FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment Commissioning Guide (Version B)

FONST 5000
Intelligent OTN Equipment
Commissioning Guide
Version: B
Code: MN000000998
FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
March 2013
Thank you for choosing our products.
We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.
Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073
Tel: +86 27 8769 1549
Fax: +86 27 8769 1755
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice
are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafer referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
All rights reserved
No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface
Related Documentation
Document Description
Introduces the retrieval method, contents, releasing,

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN
reading approach, and suggestion feedback method for
Equipment Documentation Guide
the complete manual set.
Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection

principles, network modes and applications, and technical
Equipment Product Description
specifications.
Gives a detailed introduction to structures, functions, signal

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN flow, dimensions and technical specifications of all FONST
Equipment Hardware Description 5000 hardware components, including cabinets, subracks,
cards and cables.
Gives a detailed introduction to the equipment appearance,
structures and installation, connection and layout of cables
Equipment Installation Guide
and wires as well as installation environment requirements.

Briefs how to install the equipment, connect and lay out its
Equipment Quick Installation
wires and cables.
Guide
FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Introduces the precautions, procedures and methods for
Equipment Commissioning Guide equipment commissioning.
FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Gives a detailed introduction to configuration procedures of

Equipment Configuration Guide various services and functions via the OTNM2000.
Introduces the routine inspection items and operation
procedures recommended for the maintenance personnel
Equipment Routine Maintenance
after the equipment is put into operation in the network.
Introduces general process of troubleshooting and

provides guidance on operations; gives detailed
Equipment Troubleshooting
instructions on handling of typical faults likely to be found
Guide
with the equipment.
Introduces daily operations on the equipment, including

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN preparations, notices, pre-operations, operations and post-
Equipment Daily Operation Guide operations; instructs users on basic operations based on
hardware and the network management system.
I
Document Description
FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Describes levels, classification of alarms and performance
Equipment Alarm and events; list causes and troubleshooting methods of all
Performance Reference alarms and performance events.

Equipment Card Configuration Introduces the configuration parameters of each card.
Parameter Reference
FONST Series Intelligent OTN Introduces functions, related concepts, configuration
Equipment ASON User Manual methods and maintenance methods of ASON.
Includes four manuals, i. e., product description, operation
e-Fim OTNM2000 Element guide, routine maintenance and installation guide, all of
Network Management System which are aimed at introducing common and fundamental
Manual Set contents of the OTNM2000 for a better understanding and
proficient use of the network management system.
II
Version
Version Description
Initial version.
A
Corresponds to the OTNM2000 version: 04.20.05.28
Adds the commissioning example for the N×100Gbit/s

B system.
Corresponds to the OTNM2000 version: 04.20.05.32
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
u Commissioning engineers
u Operation and maintenance engineers
To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:
u OTN technology
u Data communication technology
u Optical fiber communication technology
u SDH communication theory
u Ethernet technology
III
Conventions
Terminology Conventions
Terminology Convention
FONST 5000 FiberHome FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment
FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management

OTNM2000
System
8TDGF 8-Port Data Service Interface Card

8TDGS 8-Port Multi-Rate Interface Card
8TGX 8-Ports GE/STM16 Service Interface Card
8TA1 8-Port 2.5G Service Interface Card
16TA 16-Port Service Interface Card
2TA2 2-Port 10G Service Interface Card
TA3 40GE Service Interface Card
ETA3 40G Enhanced Service Interface Card
TA4 100GE Service Interface Card
TGX GE Interface Card with Switch Function
8EF 8-Port FC Service Distance Extension Card
MXCU Master Cross-connect Card
SXCU Slave Cross-connect Card
4-Port 2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced
LMS2E
FEC
2LMS2E 8×2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Unit
4LMS2E 16×2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Card
4-Port 10G Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced

LMS3E
FEC
LMS4E Multi-rate 100G Aggregation Line Interface Card
2LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC
MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card
Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced

OTU2E
FEC
IV
10G Bidirectional Optical Transponder Card with Super
OTU2S
FEC
OTU2F 10G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

OTU3E
Enhanced FEC
OTU3S 43G Bidirectional Transponder Card with Super FEC
OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC
OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)
100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with

OTU4E
Enhanced FEC (PM-QPSK,10×10G)
OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC
OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)
ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)
48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

VMU48_E
Attenuator (C, E)

VMU40_E
Attenuator (C, E)
OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,O)
OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,O)
ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)
ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

VMU48_O
Attenuator (C,O)

VMU40_O
Attenuator (C,O)
OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card
ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card
WDM2 2 Line WDM Card

ITL50 50GHz Grid Interleaved Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
OSCAD 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card
V
SOAD8 8 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card
SOAD4 4 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card

WSS8M
(100GHz, 1×9)
Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer Card

WSS8D
(100GHz, 1×9)

WSS8M
(50GHz, 1×9)

WSS8D
(50GHz, 1×9)

WSS4M
(50GHz, 1×5)

WSS4D
(50GHz, 1×5)
OA Optical Amplification Card
OA High Power Optical Amplifier Card (above 21dBm )
PA Pre-amplifier Card
MSA Two-Stage Amplifier with Mid-Stage Access
HOA High Power Optical Amplifier Card (above 26dBm )
ROA Remote Optical Amplifier Card
RAU_F / RAU_B Forward/Backward Raman Amplifier Unit Card
OCP Optical Channel Protection Card
OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection Card
OLP_1:1 Optical Line Protection Card (1:1)
OLP_1+1 Optical Line Protection Card (1+1)
GFF Gain Flattening Filter Card
DGE Dynamic Gain Equalizer
OPM4 4 Ch Optical Channel Performance Monitor Card
OPM8 8 Ch Optical Channel Performance Monitor Card
OTDR8 8Ch OTDR Card

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel Card
EOSC Enhanced Optical Supervisory Channel Card
CAIF1 Clock Card 1 (with Auxiliary Terminal Interface)
CAIF2 Clock Card 2 (with Auxiliary Terminal Interface)
EMVU NE Management Card (OTH subrack)
FCVU Frame Control Unit Card (OTH subrack)
VI
EFCVU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card (OTH subrack)
EMU NE Management Card (WDM subrack)
FCU Frame Control Unit Card (WDM subrack)
EFCU Enhanced Frame Control Unit Card (WDM subrack)
ASCU Control Unit Card

SCU Signaling Control Unit
PWRV Power Supply Card (OTH subrack)
PWR Power Supply Card (WDM subrack)
CTU Clock Terminal Unit

AIF Auxiliary Terminal Board
EAIF Enhanced Auxiliary Interface Card
VII
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Convention Description
Note Important features or operation guide.
Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

Caution
interruption or loss.
Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.
➔ Jump Jumps to another step.
Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service
VIII
Contents
Preface...................................................................................................................I
Related Documentation ...................................................................................I
Version ..........................................................................................................III
Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III
Conventions ................................................................................................. IV
1 Safety Precautions for Operation..................................................................1-1
1.1 Safety and Warning Sign................................................................1-2
1.2 ESD Protection Measure................................................................1-3
1.3 Operation Safety for Optical Fiber and Optical Interface..................1-5
1.4 Electrical Safety.............................................................................1-7
1.5 Operation Safety Rule for an Amplification Card .............................1-8
1.6 Operation Safety Rule for a Mechanical VOA ...............................1-10
1.7 Operation Safety of the OTNM2000 .............................................1-11
2 Commissioning Flow....................................................................................2-1
3 Preparing for Equipment Commissioning......................................................3-1
3.1 Basic Requirements on Commissioning Personnel.........................3-2
3.2 Preparing Engineering Design Documents .....................................3-2
3.3 Preparing Tools and Instruments ....................................................3-2
4 Establishing Communication with OTNM2000 ..............................................4-1
4.1 Connecting the OTNM2000 and the Equipment..............................4-2
4.2 Checking the Network Management System Services ....................4-3
4.3 Creating Network Topology ............................................................4-4
4.3.1 Operation Flow ................................................................4-4

4.3.2 Logging in the Devcfg GUI ...............................................4-5
4.3.3 Configuring Management Program...................................4-7
4.3.4 Adding Project and Part ...................................................4-9
4.3.5 Adding NE .....................................................................4-11
4.3.6 Adding Bureau and Rack ...............................................4-13
4.3.7 Adding Shelf ..................................................................4-14
4.3.8 Adding the Card.............................................................4-16
4.3.9 Establishing NE Connection...........................................4-20
4.3.10 Validating Configuration Data .........................................4-25
4.3.11 Saving Configuration Data .............................................4-26
4.3.12 Logging into the OTNM2000 ..........................................4-28
5 Commissioning for A Single Station..............................................................5-1
5.1 Flow of Equipment Commissioning at A Single Station ...................5-2
5.2 Confirming Hardware Installation....................................................5-3
5.2.1 Requirements on Hardware Inspection.............................5-3

5.2.2 Checking Subrack Address..............................................5-6
5.2.3 Cascading the Main Subrack and Extended Subracks ......5-7
5.2.4 Inspecting Optical Cables ..............................................5-11
5.3 Powering on Equipment ...............................................................5-13
5.3.1 Checking the Fuse Threshold Current of Power Supply ..5-13

5.3.2 Checking the Power Supply Equipment’s Output Voltage5-14
5.3.3 Powering on the Cabinet ................................................5-14
5.3.4 Powering on Subrack.....................................................5-15
5.4 Connecting Equipment to the OTM2000 .......................................5-16
5.4.1 DIP Switch Mode ...........................................................5-17

5.4.2 LCT Mode .....................................................................5-17
5.4.3 Configuring IP Using SN Remote Mode..........................5-22
5.4.4 Supervisory Channel .....................................................5-33
5.4.5 Checking DCC Indicator LED .........................................5-33
5.4.6 Delivering the Management Configuration ......................5-34
5.5 Commissioning Equipment Optical Power ....................................5-36
5.5.1 Tributary Interface Card .................................................5-36

5.5.2 Line Interface Card ........................................................5-37
5.5.3 Optical Transponder Card ..............................................5-38
5.5.4 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards ..................5-39
5.5.5 Fixed Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card ......................5-42
5.5.6 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card .................5-43
5.5.7 Optical Amplification Card ..............................................5-45
5.5.8 OSC / EOSC Card .........................................................5-47
5.5.9 DCM..............................................................................5-48
5.6 Configuring Intelligent Fan ...........................................................5-48
5.7 Setting the Expected Value for the Amplification Card...................5-51
5.8 Example of Optical Power Commissioning at A Single Station ......5-53
5.8.1 Project Information.........................................................5-54

5.8.2 OTM Station ..................................................................5-59
5.8.3 OLA Station ...................................................................5-64
5.8.4 OADM Station................................................................5-67
6 System Commissioning ...............................................................................6-1
6.1 General Rules for Commissioning ..................................................6-2
6.2 System Commissioning Flow .........................................................6-6
6.3 Testing the DCC ............................................................................6-7
6.4 Enabling the Performance Collection Function ...............................6-8
6.5 Adjusting the Flatness of Channel Optical Power..........................6-11
6.5.1 Operation Flow ..............................................................6-11

6.5.2 Online Spectrum Test.....................................................6-13
6.5.3 Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel .................6-15
6.6 Setting Optical Power Threshold Values .......................................6-18
6.7 Setting Dispersion Compensation for the N×40Gbit/s System .......6-21
6.8 Commissioning Example for the N×10Gbit/s System ....................6-27
6.8.1 Network Overview..........................................................6-27

6.8.2 Commissioning Order ....................................................6-28
6.8.3 Procedures of System Commissioning ...........................6-30
6.9 Commissioning Example for the N×40Gbit/s System ....................6-38

6.10 Commissioning Example for the N×100Gbit/s System ..................6-52

7 Creating Services ........................................................................................7-1

8 Testing Bit Errors .........................................................................................8-1
8.1 Testing Single Channel Error..........................................................8-2
8.2 Testing Overall Channel Error ........................................................8-3
9 Testing the Network-level Protection Functions at the Optical Layer ..............9-1
9.1 Testing Optical channel 1 +1 Wavelength Protection.......................9-2
9.2 Testing Optical channel 1+1 Route Protection.................................9-6
9.3 Testing 1 +1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching ............9-9
9.4 Testing Optical Line 1:1 Protection ...............................................9-13
9.5 Testing Optical Line 1+1 Protection ..............................................9-16
10 Testing the Network-level Protection Functions at the Electrical Layer.........10-1
10.1 Testing OCh 1+1 Protection Switching..........................................10-2
10.2 Testing OCh m: n Protection Switching .........................................10-5
10.3 Testing OCh Ring Protection Switching ........................................10-9
10.4 Testing ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching .....................................10-15
10.5 Testing ODUk m:n Protection Switching .....................................10-19
10.6 Testing ODUk Ring Protection Switching ....................................10-23
11 Testing System APR Function ....................................................................11-1
12 Testing Remote Login Function ..................................................................12-1
13 Finishing off ...............................................................................................13-1
13.1 Backing up Network Management Data........................................13-2
13.2 Making Labels .............................................................................13-2
13.3 Preparing Project Related Documents..........................................13-3
Appendix A DIP Switches of NE Management Card.................................... A-1
A.1 Instruction to DIP Switches on the EMU Card ................................ A-1
A.2 DIP Switches on the FCU Card ..................................................... A-3
A.3 DIP Switches on the EFCU Card ................................................... A-4
A.4 Instruction to DIP Switches on the EMVU Card.............................. A-4
A.5 DIP Switches on the FCVU Card ................................................... A-4
A.6 DIP Switches on the EFCVU Card................................................. A-5
Appendix B Association between GCC and Slot ......................................... B-1

Appendix C Application of the Card Self-booting Function........................... C-1
Appendix D Common Commissioning Parameter ....................................... D-1
Appendix E Abbreviation............................................................................ E-1

Figures
Figure 1-1 Wearing the ESD Protection Wrist Strap for the OTH Subrack ........1-3
Figure 1-2 Wearing the ESD Protection Wrist Strap for the Channel Subrack...1-4
Figure 1-3 The Dedicated Fiber Puller.............................................................1-5
Figure 1-4 Do Not Modify Protocol Settings...................................................1-12
Figure 1-5 Do Not Modify Protocol Properties................................................1-13
Figure 1-6 Do Not Modify Computer Name....................................................1-13
Figure 1-7 Do Not Modify LAN Settings.........................................................1-14
Figure 2-1 Flow Chart for Equipment Commissioning ......................................2-1
Figure 4-1 The Services Window ....................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 The Flow Chart for Creating Network Topology ...............................4-5
Figure 4-3 The devcfg Window ......................................................................4-6
Figure 4-4 The User Login Dialog Box ...........................................................4-7
Figure 4-5 The Manager Service config dialog box .......................................4-8
Figure 4-6 The Add project Dialog Box ..........................................................4-9
Figure 4-7 The Add part Dialog Box .............................................................4-10
Figure 4-8 The Add node Dialog Box ...........................................................4-12
Figure 4-9 The Add bureau Dialog Box ........................................................4-13
Figure 4-10 The Add rack Dialog Box ............................................................4-14
Figure 4-11 The Add shelf Dialog Box ...........................................................4-15
Figure 4-12 Adding a Card..............................................................................4-20
Figure 4-13 Bringing up the Structure Configuration View................................4-22
Figure 4-14 Dragging the NE into the Structure View.......................................4-22
Figure 4-15 The Board Port config Dialog Box ..............................................4-23
Figure 4-16 The Add Connection Line Dialog Box.........................................4-24
Figure 4-17 Establishing NE Connection.........................................................4-24
Figure 4-18 Data Validation Being Correct ......................................................4-26
Figure 4-19 Error in Data Validation ................................................................4-26
Figure 4-20 The devcfg Prompt Box...............................................................4-27
Figure 4-21 The Save As Dialog Box..............................................................4-27
Figure 4-22 The OTNM2000 Login Info Dialog Box........................................4-29
Figure 5-1 Flow Chart for Equipment Commissioning at A Single Station .........5-2
Figure 5-2 Interconnection of Management Plane Monitoring Information ........5-9
Figure 5-3 Interconnection of Control Plane Monitoring Information ...............5-11
Figure 5-4 Checking the Line Optical Power..................................................5-12
Figure 5-5 The devcfg Dialog Box ................................................................5-20
Figure 5-6 Configuring the Other Tab............................................................5-21
Figure 5-7 Flowchart of the SN-based Remote EMS Configuration ................5-23
Figure 5-8 The NE Remote IP Config Window .............................................5-24
Figure 5-9 Configuring Local NE ...................................................................5-25
Figure 5-10 Querying the Local NE SN ...........................................................5-26
Figure 5-11 Configuring Local NE IP Parameters ............................................5-27
Figure 5-12 Configuring Local NE IP Address .................................................5-27
Figure 5-13 Saving the IP Parameters of the Local NE ....................................5-28
Figure 5-14 Obtaining the Adjacent NE SN .....................................................5-31
Figure 5-15 Configuring Adjacent NE IP Parameters .......................................5-31
Figure 5-16 Configuring Adjacent NE IP Settings ............................................5-32
Figure 5-17 Setting the Fan Control Mode.......................................................5-49
Figure 5-18 Setting the Delay Value of the Fan Control....................................5-50
Figure 5-19 Setting the Expected Value of the Output Optical Power ...............5-52
Figure 5-20 Setting the Optical Attenuator Control...........................................5-53
Figure 5-21 Project Information (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A Single
Station)........................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-22 Card Configuration at Station A and Station D (Optical Power
Commissioning at A Single Station)..............................................5-55
Figure 5-23 Card Configuration at Station B (Optical Power Commissioning at A
Single Station) .............................................................................5-56
Figure 5-24 Card Configuration at Station C (Optical Power Commissioning at A
Single Station) .............................................................................5-57
Figure 5-25 Fiber Connection at OLM Station (Optical Power Commissioning at A
Single Station) .............................................................................5-60
Figure 5-26 Fiber Connection at OLA Station (Optical Power Commissioning at A
Single Station) .............................................................................5-65
Figure 5-27 Fiber Connection at OADM Station (Optical Power Commissioning at
A Single Station Using the ODU+OMU Mode) ..............................5-68
A Single Station Using the SOAD8 Mode) ....................................5-74
A Single Station Using the WSS8M Mode) ...................................5-78
a single Station Using the WSS8D Mode).....................................5-83
A Single Station Using the Wss8d+Omu Mode) ............................5-88
A Single Station Using the WSS8M+ODU Mode)..........................5-92
A Single Station Using the WSS8M+WSS8D Mode) .....................5-97
Figure 6-1 Reference Points of the WDM System............................................6-2
Figure 6-2 System Commissioning Flow Chart ................................................6-7
Figure 6-3 Enabling the Performance Gathering..............................................6-9
Figure 6-4 Performance Collection Configuration Result................................6-10
Figure 6-5 Flowchart of Commissioning the Flatness of the Channel Optical
Power..........................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-6 Spectrum Test Window of the OPM Card......................................6-14
Figure 6-7 Spectrum Test Result of the OPM Card ........................................6-15
Figure 6-8 The VOA Adjustment Control of the VMU Card.............................6-16
Figure 6-9 The Channel Working Status of the VMU Card .............................6-17
Figure 6-10 Setting Optical Power Threshold of the OCP Card ........................6-20
Figure 6-11 Dispersion Compensation for A 40G System ................................6-22
Figure 6-12 The Amplifier and TDCM Configuration Tab..................................6-24
Figure 6-13 Setting TDCM Self-adaptive Dispersion Compensation ................6-26
Figure 6-14 Sequence of Channel Optical Power Testing – Example of
Commissioning the N×10Gbit/s System .......................................6-29
Figure 6-15 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A – Example of
Figure 6-16 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station C – Example of
Figure 6-17 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station D – Example of
Figure 6-18 System Network – Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s
System ........................................................................................6-39
Figure 6-19 Amplification Card and DCM Configuration – Example of
Figure 6-20 Card Configuration at Station A and Station D - Example of
Figure 6-21 Card Configuration at Station B and Station C - Example of
Figure 6-22 Fiber Connection at Station A and Station D - Example of
Figure 6-23 Fiber Connection at Station B and Station C - Example of
Figure 6-25 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A and Station D –
Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/S System.....................6-48
Figure 6-26 Amplification Card and TDCM Configuration – Example of
Figure 6-27 System Network Diagram-Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/
s System .....................................................................................6-53
Figure 6-28 Card Configuration Diagram for Station A - Example of
Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System .....................................6-54
Figure 6-29 Card Configuration Diagram for Station B - Example of
Figure 6-30 Card Configuration Diagram for Station E - Example of
Figure 6-31 Optical Fiber Connection at Station A - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System....................................................................6-56
Figure 6-32 Optical Fiber Connection at Station B - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System....................................................................6-57
Figure 6-33 Optical Fiber Connection at Station E - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System....................................................................6-57
Figure 6-35 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A and Station O –
Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System ...................6-62
Figure 6-36 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station E, Station J and
Station N – Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System..6-63
Figure 8-1 Error Test Connection of The A Single Channel ..............................8-2
Figure 8-2 Error Test Connection of All Channels ............................................8-4
Figure 9-1 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection Schematic Diagram....9-2
Figure 9-2 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection Schematic Diagram.............9-6
Figure 9-3 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Schematic Diagram........9-10
Figure 9-4 Optical Line1:1 Protection Schematic Diagram .............................9-13
Figure 9-5 Optical Line1+1 Protection Schematic Diagram ............................9-17
Figure 10-1 OCh 1+1 Protection Switching Test ..............................................10-2
Figure 10-2 OCh 1:2 Protection Switching Test ...............................................10-6
Figure 10-3 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test ...........................................10-10
Figure 10-4 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test ..........................................10-16
Figure 10-5 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test ..........................................10-19
Figure 10-6 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test.........................................10-24
Figure 11-1 APR Function Testing Connection Diagram ..................................11-2
Figure 12-1 Connection Diagram For The Remote Login Test..........................12-1
Figure A-1 DIP Switches Inside the EMU Card ............................................... A-2
Tables
Table 1-1 Safety and Warning Signs ..............................................................1-2

Table 1-2 Saturated Output Optical Power of Common Amplification Card .....1-9
Table 3-1 Tools and Instruments Required for the Commissioning..................3-3
Table 4-1 Configuration Item Description of the Manager Service config Dialog
Box................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-2 Configuration Items of the Add part Dialog Box............................4-10
Table 4-3 Configuration Items of the Add node Dialog Box ..........................4-12
Table 4-4 Configuration Items of the Add shelf Dialog Box ..........................4-15
Table 4-5 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the OTH Subrack ..........4-16
Table 4-6 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the Channel Subrack ....4-18
Table 4-7 Description for Adding Interfaces..................................................4-20
Table 4-8 Related Services of the Network Management System and the
Database.....................................................................................4-28
Table 5-1 Descriptions of the Subrack Address Switches ...............................5-6
Table 5-2 NE IP Settings .............................................................................5-29
Table 5-3 Incident Optical Power Requirements of Single Channel...............5-38
Table 5-4 Optical Power Parameters (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A
Single Station) .............................................................................5-58
Table 5-5 Parameters of the Optical Amplification Cards (for Commissioning the
Optical Power at A Single Station)................................................5-58
Table 5-6 Insertion Loss Index (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A Single
Station)........................................................................................5-59
Table 6-1 Cards Applicable for Setting Optical Power Threshold Values .......6-19
Table 6-2 Rules for Setting Optical Power Alarm Threshold..........................6-20
Table 6-3 Optical Power Parameters–Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/
s System .....................................................................................6-44
Table 6-4 Parameters of the Amplification Card – Example of Commissioning
the N×40Gbit/s System ................................................................6-44
Table 6-5 Insertion Loss Parameters – Commissioning Example for the
N×40Gbit/s System......................................................................6-44
Table 6-6 Optical Power Values of Each Channel Displayed by the OPM4 Card
– Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System ..................6-48
Table 6-7 Optical Power of Each Channel and Attenuation Values of Each VMU
Channel - Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System .....6-50
Table 6-8 Optical Power Parameters–Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System....................................................................6-58
Table 6-9 Insertion Loss Parameters – Commissioning Example for the
N×100Gbit/s System....................................................................6-58
Table 6-10 Optical Power Values of Each Channel Displayed by the OPM4 Card
– Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System.................6-63
Table 6-11 Optical Power of Each Channel and Attenuation Values of Each VMU
Channel - Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System....6-65
Table 9-1 Optical Channel 1+1 Channel Protection Switching Test – Normal
Status............................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection Switching Test – Switching
Status............................................................................................9-4
Table 9-3 Optical Channel 1+1 Channel Protection Switching Test – Normal
Status............................................................................................9-7
Table 9-4 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection Switching Test – Switching
Status............................................................................................9-8
Table 9-5 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching Test – Normal
Status..........................................................................................9-11
Table 9-6 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching Test – Switching
Status..........................................................................................9-12
Table 9-7 Optical line 1:1 Protection Test – Normal Status............................9-14
Table 9-8 Optical Line 1:1 Protection Test – Switching Status.......................9-15
Table 9-9 Optical Line 1+1 Protection Test – Normal Status .........................9-18
Table 9-10 Optical Line 1+1 Protection Test – Switching Status......................9-19
Table 10-1 Och 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Normal Status .....................10-3
Table 10-2 Och 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Switching Status..................10-4
Table 10-3 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Normal Status.....................10-7
Table 10-4 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status .................10-8
Table 10-5 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Normal Status ............... 10-11
Table 10-6 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test – Local End Switching
Status........................................................................................10-12
Table 10-7 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test – Far End Switching Status.10-14
Table 10-8 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Normal Status ................10-17
Table 10-9 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Switching Status.............10-17
Table 10-10 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test – Normal Status.................10-21
Table 10-11 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status.............10-21
Table 10-12 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Normal Status ...............10-25
Table 10-13 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Local End Switching
Status........................................................................................10-26
Table 10-14 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Far End Switching
Status........................................................................................10-27
Table B-1 GCC Allocation Table.................................................................... B-1
Table D-1 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGF Card ....................... D-1
Table D-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card ....................... D-1
Table D-3 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card ......................... D-2
Table D-4 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card .......................... D-3
Table D-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card .......................... D-4
Table D-6 FC400 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card ............... D-5
Table D-10 Optical Interface Specifications of the 10TA2 Card......................... D-7
Table D-11 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the TA3 Card ................ D-8
Table D-12 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the ETA3 Card .............. D-9
Table D-13 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the TA4 Card........... D-9
Table D-14 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the TGX Card ............. D-10
Table D-15 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card .......................... D-11
Table D-16 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the LMS2E Card ......... D-12
Table D-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card ................... D-12
Table D-18 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LMS2E Card ................... D-13
Table D-19 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) D-14
Table D-20 Inner PA Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot) ............ D-15
Table D-21 Inner PA Specifications of the TDCM Card (Double-slot).............. D-15
Table D-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot).. D-15
Table D-23 Inner PA Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot).............. D-16
Table D-24 Inner TDCM Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) ........ D-16
Table D-25 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS4E
Card ........................................................................................... D-17
Table D-26 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card ........................ D-17
Table D-29 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-
16 / OTU1 Service) ..................................................................... D-20
Table D-30 Client Side Interface Specifications of the MST2 Card (the 10GE
Service) ...................................................................................... D-21
Table D-31 Specifications of Wavelength Division Optical Interfaces on the MST2
Card ........................................................................................... D-21
Table D-32 Client Side Interface Specifications of the OTU2S Card ............... D-22
Table D-33 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2S
Card ........................................................................................... D-22
Table D-34 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2E Card ... D-23
Table D-35 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2E
Card ........................................................................................... D-24
Table D-36 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2F
Card ........................................................................................... D-24
Table D-37 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU3S Card ... D-25
Card ........................................................................................... D-25
Table D-39 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3S Card.................... D-26
Table D-40 Specifications for the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card .............. D-27
Card ........................................................................................... D-27
Table D-43 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3E Card.................... D-28
Table D-44 Specifications for the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card .............. D-29
Card ........................................................................................... D-29
Table D-46 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3F Card.................... D-30
Table D-47 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU3S Card ... D-30
Card ........................................................................................... D-31
Card ........................................................................................... D-33
Card ........................................................................................... D-33
Table D-52 Specification of the OA Card ....................................................... D-34
Table D-53 Specification of the PA Card........................................................ D-35
Table D-54 Specification of the HOA Card..................................................... D-35
Table D-55 Specifications of the RAU Card ................................................... D-37
Table D-56 Specification of the ROA Card..................................................... D-37
Table D-57 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturated Output is 21dBm) ...... D-38
Table D-58 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturated Output is 24dBm) ...... D-39
Table D-59 Specifications of the OCP Card ................................................... D-40
Table D-60 Specifications of the OMSP Card ................................................ D-40
Table D-61 Specifications of the OLP_1+1 Card............................................ D-40
Table D-62 Specifications of the OLP_1:1 Card............................................. D-41
Table D-63 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the OSC Card............. D-42
Table D-64 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kbit/
s)................................................................................................ D-42
Table D-65 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kHz) D-43
Table D-66 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card
(2048kHz)................................................................................... D-44
Table D-67 Specifications of the GE Optical Interface of the EOSC Card ....... D-44
Table D-68 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card .................................... D-45
Table D-69 G.652 Optical Fiber - DCM Parameters ....................................... D-45
Table D-70 G.655 Optical Fiber - DCM Specifications.................................... D-45
1 Safety Precautions for Operation
Before implementing commissioning and maintenance of the FONST 5000, make

sure that you have been acquainted with the safety precautions for the FONST
5000, so as to prevent personal injury and damage to the equipment during the
operation.
Safety and Warning Sign
ESD Protection Measure
Operation Safety for Optical Fiber and Optical Interface
Electrical Safety
Operation Safety Rule for an Amplification Card
Operation Safety Rule for a Mechanical VOA
Operation Safety of the OTNM2000
Version: B 1-1
FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment Commissioning Guide
1.1 Safety and Warning Sign
Operators should know the meanings of the safety and warning signs on the
FONST 5000. Table 1-1 lists the meanings and locations of the signs.
Table 1-1 Safety and Warning Signs
Sign Meaning Location

The ESD protection sign. This
sign reminds the operators to wear
an ESD protection wrist strap, so Located on the side of
as to avoid damage to the the subrack.
equipment caused by electrostatic
on human bodies.
The subrack earth ground sign.

Located on the top of
This sign marks the location of the
the subrack.
subrack earth ground pole.
The laser class sign. This sign

marks the optical source class of
Located on the panels
the optical interface on a card. The
of the cards with optical
operators must prevent the optical
interfaces.
source from entering eyes directly
to avoid bodily harm.
Warning sign for periodical

cleaning of the anti-dust screen. Located on the panel of
This sign reminds the operators to the subrack’s anti-dust
clean the anti-dust screen screen.
periodically.
The channel subrack power card

Located on the channel
safety sign. This sign reminds the
subrack power card
operators not to operate on the
panel.
card when it is powered.
The fan unit safety warning sign of

Located on the panel of
the channel subrack. This sign
the channel subrack
reminds the operators not to touch
fan unit.
the running fan blades.
The fan unit safety warning sign of

the OTH subrack. This sign Located on the panel of
reminds the operators to pull out the OTH subrack fan
the fan 5 cm, wait for 1 minute and unit.
then remove the fan.
1-2 Version: B
1.2 ESD Protection Measure
The human body electrostatic can damage electrostatic-sensitive components on

the cards and subracks; therefore, you must wear the ESD protection wrist strap (as
shown inFigure 1-1 and Figure 1-2) or take other measures before touching any
equipment, card, or IC (Integrated Circuit) chip. Use the ESD protection bags to
store and transport cards.
Figure 1-1 Wearing the ESD Protection Wrist Strap for the OTH Subrack
Version: B 1-3
Figure 1-2 Wearing the ESD Protection Wrist Strap for the Channel Subrack
Note:
u The ESD protection wrist strap is an accessory of the equipment.
u The method for wearing the ESD protection wrist strap:
1) Put one end of the strap around the wrist and make sure that the
metal fastener of the ESD protection wrist strap is in good
contact with the skin.
2) Connect the other end of the wrist strap to the ESD protection
earth ground fastener on the cabinet or the subrack (See Safety
and Warning Signfor the position of the ESD protection earth
ground fastener).
1-4 Version: B
1.3 Operation Safety for Optical Fiber and Optical

Interface
The following introduces the operation precautions of optical fibers connection and
fiber / interface cleaning.
Using Dedicated Fiber Puller
FONST 5000's optical interfaces are distributed densely, so that plugging /

unplugging the fiber by hand may damage the fiber. Therefore, always use the
special fiber puller (as shown in Figure 1-3) to plug or unplug optical fibers.
(1) Fiber puller (2) Buckle (attach it to the (3) Spring cord
mounting hole on the vertical
mounting flange)
Figure 1-3 The Dedicated Fiber Puller
Version: B 1-5
Note:
The special fiber puller is a standard accessory of the equipment. It has

been secured on the cabinet with spring cord before delivery. By clipping
the fiber connector with the special fiber puller, you can plug or unplug the
fiber very conveniently.
Protecting Optical Modules Against High Optical Power
If the pigtail’s output optical power is unknown, you should just put the pigtail in the
card’s optical interface without connecting them or add an attenuator, instead of
plugging the pigtail directly into the optical interface, so as to protect optical modules
against being damaged by high optical power.
Connection of Optical Fiber
u Before connecting optical fibers, check the output optical power of the pigtail.
Connect optical fibers only when the optical power meets the equipment
requirements.
u Before connecting optical fibers, check whether the optical fiber connector
matches the optical interface. If not, use an adapter.
Protecting Eyes
Prevent laser radiation from injuring the eyes. Pay special attention to the optical
amplifier card, which outputs invisible light with high optical power. Looking directly
into its output interface or the end surface of the pigtail connected to it will hurt your
eyes.
Avoiding Excessive Bending of Fibers
The WDM system is sensitive to the optical power. However, excessive bending of
or pressing on the pigtail is liable to affect the optical power. If bends are necessary,
the fiber bending radius should never be less than 38mm.
1-6 Version: B
Protection
u Cover the optical interfaces and optical connectors of the pigtail fibers that are
not in use with anti-dust caps. This can avoid eye injuries caused by a direct
and unintentional look into the optical interfaces or optical connectors, and
prevent dust from entering the optical interfaces or contaminating the optical
connectors.
u Optical interfaces on a replaced card should also be covered with anti-dust

caps in a timely manner to keep them clean.
Cleaning
While cleaning fiber interface connectors or active connectors, special cleaning

tools and materials should be used. The following lists some common tools for
cleaning. The maintenance staff can choose to prepare some of them.
u Dedicated cleaning solvent (the first choice is the isoamyl alcohol and then
comes the propyl alcohol)
u The non-woven lens paper
u Dedicated compressed air
u Cotton swab (cotton for medical purposes or other long-staple cotton)
u Dedicated reel connector cleaner
u Dedicated magnifier for optical connectors
1.4 Electrical Safety
The following discusses the electrical safety precautions for the maintenance staff.
The purpose is to avoid electrical accidents such as shorting and bad grounding.
Shorting
When shorting occurs, an excessive current surge may damage the equipment and
leave potential safety risks. When operating the equipment, you should pay
attention to the following aspects:
u Prevent conductors (such as metal filings and water) from dropping into the live
equipment, so as to avoid shorting.
Version: B 1-7
u Avoid shorting caused by incorrect cable connections.
u Avoid shorting caused by small animals entering the equipment.
Grounding
u Make sure that the protection earth ground bar in the equipment room is
grounded correctly.
u Make sure the equipment is well-grounded.
Power Supply
u Make sure the power is shut down before removing the power cable.
u The power cable should not be exposed. The exposed part should be wrapped
by insulating tape.
u When the operation conditions permit, disconnect the power supply before
implementing other operations.
1.5 Operation Safety Rule for an Amplification

Card
The following discusses the safety rules for operating various amplification cards.
OA / PA / HOA / MSA Card
Warning:
If the surface of the fiber connector is not clean, the fiber will easily get
burnt due to the high output optical power of the amplification card.
The OUT interface on the OA / PA / HOA / MSA card and the MOUT interface on the
MSA card may output an ultra high optical power. Therefore, to guarantee the safety
of human body and the equipment, you should keep to the following rules during the
test and maintenance of the corresponding card:
1-8 Version: B
u After powering on the card, you must remove the anti-dust cap from the
connector of the OUT / MOUT interface, so as to avoid burning the anti-dust
cap.
u Avoid exposure of the human body to the optical signals from the OUT / MOUT
interface. Never look directly into the optical interfaces.
u Make sure you wear an ESD protection wrist during operation, so as to prevent
the amplification card from electrostatic discharge.
u Cut off the pump laser of the card (by pressing down the CUT button on the
card panel) before connecting or testing the OUT / MOUT interface.
u While testing the OUT / MOUT interface’s output optical power, verify if the
instrument’s measurement scope meets the measuring range requirement at
first. The common amplification card's saturated output optical power is shown
in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Saturated Output Optical Power of Common Amplification Card
Amplification Card (Optical Interface) Saturated Output Power
The HOA card's OUT interface 27dBm

The OA card's OUT interface 24dBm (or 21dBm) Note 1
The MSA card's OUT interface 24dBm (or 21dBm) Note 2
The MSA card's MOUT interface 14dBm

The PA card's OUT interface 14dBm
Note 1: According to different modules, the OA card has two types of saturated output optical
power.
Note 2: According to different modules, the MSA card has two types of saturated output optical
power.
u While connecting fibers on the OUT/MOUT interfaces, make sure the fiber
connector is clean.
RAU_F / RAU_B / ROA Card
The OUT interface of the RAU_F card, the IN interface of the RAU_B card and the
LINE interface of the ROA card is all the output interface of the pump laser, and its
output optical power is extremely high. So keep to following rules during the test or
maintenance of these cards:
Version: B 1-9
u After electrifying the card, you must remove the anti-dust cap from the
connector of the OUT/IN/LINE interface, so as to avoid burning the anti-dust
cap.
u Do not direct the output signal of the OUT/IN/LINE interface to the human body,
especially to eyes.
u Wear the ESD protection wrist strap in operation to avoid damage to the
amplifier from electrostatic on human body.
u Shut down the pump laser of the card (by depressing the CUT key on the card
panel) before connecting or testing on the OUT/IN/LINE interfaces.
u Do not attenuate the input signal of the OUT/IN/LINE interfaces by an

attenuator.
Warning:
An attenuator used in a Raman amplifier will attenuate the pump power,
weaken the Raman amplifier’s work in amplification, and even burn the
IN / LINE interface.
u Before testing the OUT / IN / LINE interface’s output optical power, check
whether the instrument’s measurement range meets the requirement first.
u While connecting the fiber on the OUT/IN/LINE interface, make sure that the
fiber connector is clean.
1.6 Operation Safety Rule for a Mechanical VOA
u VOA, i.e. the ATT button, is provided on the panels of the ITL50 card, SOAD8
card and SOAD4 card. Make sure that you are turning the button in the right
direction.
4 The ATT button is used to adjust the optical power attenuation value for the
input signals in the CE- / CO-band.
¡ Turn the button clockwise to reduce the attenuation value.
¡ Turn the button counterclockwise to increase the attenuation value.
4 Turn the ATT button on the panels of the SOAD8 card and SOAD4 card in
different directions for the purposes below:
1-10 Version: B
¡ Turn the button clockwise to increase the attenuation value.
¡ Turn the button counterclockwise to reduce the attenuation value.
u Adjust the VOA slowly and steadily to avoid abrupt change of the optical power,
which may interfere with the services or damage the VOA. which may interfere
with the services or damage the VOA.
1.7 Operation Safety of the OTNM2000
Operation safety rules of the OTNM2000 computer are as follows:
u The network management computer should be placed away from direct

sunlight, electromagnetic interference, heat source, humidity and dust, and with
at least 8cm distance from other objects in order to keep good ventilation.
u Use UPS power supply to avoid loss of network management data caused by
accidental power failure.
u The computer case, UPS power supply and switch (or hub) should be
connected to the protection earth ground.
u To shut down the network management computer, first exit the operation
system normally and then shut off the power supply.
u Do not exit the network management system when it is working normally.

Exiting the network management system does not interrupt traffic in the
network, but precludes centralized control of the networked equipment.
u The network management computer cannot be used for purposes other than
network management. Use of unidentified memory devices should be
prohibited so as to avoid computer viruses.
u Do not delete any file in the network management system randomly or copy
any irrelevant file into the network management computer.
u Do not visit Internet via the network management computer. Doing so may
increase data flow in the net card and hence affects normal network
management data transmission or results in other accidents.
Version: B 1-11
u Do not perform service configuration or expansion during service busy hours

via the network management system.
u Do not modify the network management computer’s protocol settings,

computer name or LAN settings. Doing so may result in abnormal operation of
network management system.
Figure 1-4 Do Not Modify Protocol Settings
1-12 Version: B
Figure 1-5 Do Not Modify Protocol Properties
Figure 1-6 Do Not Modify Computer Name
Version: B 1-13
Figure 1-7 Do Not Modify LAN Settings
1-14 Version: B
2 Commissioning Flow
Figure 2-1 illustrates the flow for the equipment commissioning.
Figure 2-1 Flow Chart for Equipment Commissioning
Version: B 2-1
3 Preparing for Equipment
Commissioning
The following introduces the preparation required before the FONST 5000
commissioning.
Basic Requirements on Commissioning Personnel
Preparing Engineering Design Documents
Preparing Tools and Instruments
Version: B 3-1
3.1 Basic Requirements on Commissioning

Personnel
Before performing the commissioning work, the commissioning personnel should

take trainings on commissioning optical network equipment, be proficient in using
various commissioning tools, and meet the following requirements:
u Be familiar with OTN, SDH and Ethernet related theories.
u Be familiar with the FONST 5000 equipment.
u Be familiar with the OTNM2000, and be proficient in service configuration via

the OTNM2000.
u Be proficient in the use of common commissioning tools and instruments (for

SDH and Ethernet testing).
3.2 Preparing Engineering Design Documents
The following engineering design documents should be prepared before the

equipment commissioning. These documents help you get familiar with the whole
project, and facilitate quick and smooth commissioning.
u Network diagrams (including entire network connection diagrams, basic

topology diagrams and network management connection diagrams).
u NE IP address assignment table.
u Cabinet and subrack configuration diagram.
u Service and wavelength assignment diagram.
u Amplification card and DCM configuration diagram.
u Optical fiber connection diagram.
u System insertion loss diagram.
3.3 Preparing Tools and Instruments
See Table 3-1 for the tools and instruments required for the commissioning of the
FONST 5000.
3-2 Version: B
3 Preparing for Equipment Commissioning
Table 3-1 Tools and Instruments Required for the Commissioning
Tool and Instrument Usage
Spectrum analyzer Used to test parameters such as the system optical spectrum.
Used to test the optical interface’s Tx / Rx optical power,

Optical power meter
receiving sensitivity, overload optical power, etc.
Used for the performance and parameters test of the SDH

SDH signal analyzer
service.
Used for performance and parameters test of the Ethernet
SmartBits tester
service.
Multimeter Used for the power voltage of the equipment.
Used for the optical line maintenance and fault isolation and
OTDR measuring parameters such as the optical fiber length,
transmission attenuation and interface attenuation.
Portable PC and LCT With EMS_f monitoring software preconfigured, used for start-
monitoring cable up and commissioning of station.
Used for network management configuration, and the

OTNM2000 querying of alarms, performance, protection channel status
data, etc.
Used for the adjustment of the Rx optical power on the Rx
Fixed optical attenuator optical interface during commissioning, to protect the interface
against any overhigh optical power.
Variable optical attenuator Used for test of optical interface sensitivity and overload
(VOA) optical power.
Used for the self loopback of an optical interface and the Rx

Pigtail for test
or Tx optical power test.
Ring flange Used for the connection of pigtail.
WDM equipment special fiber

Used for the cleanness of the fiber end surface.
wiping paper
Used for the adjustment of the mechanical VOA on the ITL50 /

Mini flat screwdriver
SOAD8 / SOAD4 card panel.
Blower Used for the cleanness of the anti-dust screen.

Used to protect sensitive components on the equipment
ESD protection wrist strap
against any electrostatic discharge.
ESD protection bag Used for containing of replaced cards and other components.
Used for the cable connection and replacement. Used for the
Cross screwdriver
replacement of the fan unit of the OTH subrack.
Dedicated fiber puller Used for plugging and unplugging the optical connector.
Pay attention to the instructions given below while operating the tools and meters:
Version: B 3-3
u While operating an optical spectrum analyzer, an SDH signal analyzer or a

SmartBits analyzer, ensure that it is connected reliably with the equipment’s
earth ground cable. Otherwise, the test data might be inaccurate, or the related
components of the meter might be damaged during the test.
u Make sure the optical power of signals input into the optical spectrum analyzer
or the SDH signal analyzer is in allowable range. Overhigh optical power will
damage the circuit inside the instrument.
Caution:
The recommended input optical power range for a meter is between -15
dBm and -10 dBm.
3-4 Version: B
4 Establishing Communication with
OTNM2000
Create the network topology on the OTNM2000 and connect the equipment to the
OTNM2000 server, so as to accomplish the monitoring on the equipment via the
OTNM2000.
Connecting the OTNM2000 and the Equipment
Checking the Network Management System Services
Creating Network Topology
Version: B 4-1
4.1 Connecting the OTNM2000 and the

Equipment
Connecting the equipment with the network management computer is a prerequisite

for monitoring the operating condition of and configuring services on the equipment.
Tool / Instrument
Two network cables, Hub, and other network connection devices
Prerequisites
None.
Procedure
Note:
Different network connection devices can be used to connect the network

management server and the equipment. Hub is commonly used in a
project. In the following example the Hub is used as the network
connection device.
1. Take a network cable, and connect one end of the network cable to the network
card of the host, and the other end to the non-cascade network interface.
2. Take another network cable, and connect one end of the network cable to the
idle non-cascade network interface of the Hub, and the other end to the F1/F2
interface on the auxiliary terminal board of the FONST 5000.
3. Start up the network management computer, right-click My Network Places of

the WINDOWS system, and select Properties from the shortcut menu that
appears to check whether the network cable has been connected to the device
network card. If not, connect the network cable to the network interface on the
device network card planned for the host.
4-2 Version: B
4 Establishing Communication with OTNM2000
4.2 Checking the Network Management System

Services
Whether the OTNM2000 can work normally depends on whether the services of the
EMS can be activated normally.
Prerequisites
Users have logged into the EMS computer.
Procedures
1. Click Start→Management Tools→Services on the network management

computer to bring up the Services GUI, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 The Services Window
Version: B 4-3
2. Check whether the Status of the following services are Actived in the window;
if not, activate the services.
4 EMS_AuthUserRight,EMS_DataBusServer,EMS_DispServer
EMS_Dumper,EMS_DtServer,EMS_Dumper,EMS_FileServer,
EMS_FileZilla Server,EMS_Manager2,EMS_Monitor,
EMS_MSMPServer,EMS_OtnmCfgServer and EMS_QueryServer.
4 The relevant database services: MySQL or Informix IDS.
4.3 Creating Network Topology
According to the practical project configurations (such as networking and single

station configuration), the user should create the corresponding network topology
on the OTNM2000 to monitor the equipment.
4.3.1 Operation Flow
Figure 4-2 shows the flow of creating the network topology.
4-4 Version: B
Figure 4-2 The Flow Chart for Creating Network Topology
4.3.2 Logging in the Devcfg GUI
All operations in the network topology creation are performed in the Devcfg GUI, so
you should log in the Devcfg GUI at first.
Version: B 4-5
Prerequisites
The OTNM2000 system has been correctly installed.
Procedures
1. Double-click the icon on the desktop to open the Devcfg window, as

shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 The devcfg Window
2. Click the Login button in the toolbar and the User Login dialog box appears as
4-6 Version: B
Figure 4-4 The User Login Dialog Box
3. Enter user name and password (normally both are 1 by default) in the User
Login dialog box and click the Login button.
4.3.3 Configuring Management Program
Only when the management program is correctly configured can the OTNM2000
monitors the equipment normally.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Logging in the Devcfg GUI.
Procedures
1. Click Advance→Management in the main menu of the devcfg window, the

Manager Service config dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-5.
Version: B 4-7
Figure 4-5 The Manager Service config dialog box
2. According to Table 4-1, configure the IP addresses, ports and types for all
managers of the computer in the Manager Service config dialog box.
Table 4-1 Configuration Item Description of the Manager Service config Dialog Box
Item Description
IP address of the database network card used by

Host IP
the server.
Select this item when the communication protocol
TP4-2 between the OTNM2000 and the EMU / EMVU is
TP4.
Protocol
Select this item when the communication protocol
UDP between the OTNM2000 and the EMU / EMVU is
TCP / IP.
SDH Select SDH for the SDH, PTN and OTN
Type equipment. For the equipment that has the ASON
ASON
control plane, select ASON.
When Type is set to SDH, configure this item to

7888
7888.
Port When Type is set to ASON, configure this item to
7889 7889.
The OTN equipment is set to ASON and 7889.
IP address The IP address of the equipment network card.
4-8 Version: B
3. After configuring the attributes, click Modify to save the configuration.
4. Click OK to complete the configuration of the management program.
4.3.4 Adding Project and Part
The following introduces the operation procedures of adding the project and part.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Configuring Management Program.
Procedures
1. Click Logical Cfg in the devcfg window to access the Logical Cfg tab.
2. Right-click a blank area in the Logical Cfg tab and select Add Project from the
shortcut menu. The Add project dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 The Add project Dialog Box
3. Configure Project Name in the Add project dialog box.
Note:
For Project No. and Project Guid, you can use the default value or
configure them according to the actual condition.
4. Click Add button to complete the project property configuration.
5. Right-click a project in the Logical Cfg tab and select Add Part from the
shortcut menu. The Add part dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-7.
Version: B 4-9
Figure 4-7 The Add part Dialog Box
6. According to the introduction in Table 4-2, configure the part's properties in the
Add part dialog box.
Table 4-2 Configuration Items of the Add part Dialog Box
Item Description
Number of the NE for the active manager. One part can and must be
Ma NE No. (0-255)
configured with only one Ma.
Number of the NE for the standby manager. One part can and must
Mb NE No. (0-255)
be configured with only one Mb.
The maximum times allowed for a data package to be forwarded

Network Period (0-255) before it reaches the destination. Usually, the network period is set
to the number of all NEs in the part plus 1.
The manager service here corresponds to the manager service

configuration in Configuring Management Program. If multiple
Manager Service
management programs are configured, you should select the
program that manages the part.
The OTNM2000 will create it automatically in sequence; users also

Manager Part No. (1-
can configure this item if necessary. The manager part number
255)
should be unique under the same management program.
4-10 Version: B
Table 4-2 Configuration Items of the Add part Dialog Box (Continued)
Item Description
The workstation of the part. Click on the left side of Workstation

item to display all management programs of the project. As shown in
Figure 4-7, if you select No.1 Management Program, then the part
Workstation
uses No.1 Management Program. If you click on the left of this
management program, you can go further and enable the gateway
NE.
When the network management server manages the equipment via
the DCN, you should click left to the selected management
Enable Gate NE program to expand the property configuration items of the gateway
NE. Select Enable Gate NE and configure the IP address, mask
and gateway of the gateway NE.
Gate NE IP IP address of the gateway NE.
Gate NE Mask Subnet mask of the gateway NE.
Gate NE Gateway Gateway IP address of the gateway NE.
The OTNM2000 will create it automatically in sequence; users also

Part Name
can configure this item if necessary.
Caution:
Usually, the engineers of FiberHome perform the gateway NE

configuration. To avoid network congestion and disconnection between
the NEs and the EMS, it is not recommended that users perform it
themselves.
7. Click Add when the configuration is completed.
4.3.5 Adding NE
The following introduces the operation procedures of adding NEs.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Adding Project and Part.
Version: B 4-11
Procedures
1. Right-click a part in the Logical Cfg tab and select Add NE from the shortcut
menu. The Add node dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 The Add node Dialog Box
2. According to the introduction in Table 4-3, configure the NE's properties in the
Add node dialog box.
Table 4-3 Configuration Items of the Add node Dialog Box
Item Description
NE Name You can set the NE name as required.
NE Type Select FONST 5000 in the drop-down list.
EMU Card Type Select Fonst 5000 EMU in the drop-down list.
ID number 1 of the NE hardware. It should be configured according

Switch1
to the switch planning for the network.
ID number 2 of the NE hardware. It should be configured according

Switch2
to the switch planning for the network.
IP address IP address of NE.

IP mask NE’s mask address. Usually, it is set to 255.255.255.0.
4-12 Version: B
4.3.6 Adding Bureau and Rack
The following introduces the operation procedures of adding bureau and rack.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Adding NE.
Procedures
1. Click Physical Cfg in the devcfg window to access the Physical Cfg tab.
2. Right-click a blank area in the Physical Cfg tab and select Add Bureau from
the shortcut menu. The Add bureau dialog box appears as shown in
Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 The Add bureau Dialog Box
3. Configure Bureau Name in the Add bureau dialog box.
4. Click Add to complete the bureau property configuration.
5. Right-click the corresponding bureau and select Add Rack from the shortcut
menu. The Add rack dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Version: B 4-13
Figure 4-10 The Add rack Dialog Box
6. Usually, Rack Layers is set to 3 (the default value) in the Add rack dialog box.
4.3.7 Adding Shelf
The following introduces the operation procedures of adding shelf.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Adding Bureau and Rack.
Procedures
1. Right-click the corresponding rack in the Physical Cfg tab and select Add
Shelf from the shortcut menu to open the Add shelf dialog box; or you can
click the corresponding rack to open the rack view. Then right-click the rack in
the rack view and select Add Shelf to bring up the Add shelf dialog box.
4-14 Version: B
Figure 4-11 The Add shelf Dialog Box
2. See Table 4-4 for the configuration items of the Add shelf dialog box.
Table 4-4 Configuration Items of the Add shelf Dialog Box
Item Description
The system will create it automatically in sequence; the users

Shelf No. (1-65535) also can configure this item if necessary. The shelf number
should be unique under the same rack.
Select FONST5000_F and FONST5000_B for the OTH subrack

(FONST5000_F represents the front side of the OTH subrack
Shelf Type and FONST5000_B represents the back side of the OTH
subrack).
Select FONST 4000 WDM for the channel subrack.
Project No. The number of the project to which the shelf belongs.
Part No. (0-32767) The number of the part to which the shelf belongs.
NE No. (0-255) The number of the NE to which the shelf belongs.
Group No. (0-255) The number of the group to which the shelf belongs.
Shelf Name You can name the shelf as desired.
Note:
Usually, only Shelf Type and Shelf Name need to be configured in the
Add shelf dialog box.
Version: B 4-15
4.3.8 Adding the Card
The following introduces the operation procedures of adding card.
Background Information
Table 4-5 lists the corresponding relationships between the cards and the OTH
subrack slots.
Table 4-5 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the OTH Subrack
Suitable Slot Suitable Slot

Card Name Remark
(Front) (Back)
8TDGF, 8TDGS, 8TGX, 8TA1, 8TS1, 8EF,

16TA, 2TA2, 4TA2, 8TA2, 10TA2, TA3,
ETA3, TA4, TGX, LMS2E, 2LMS2E,
4LMS2E, 2LA2, 4LA2, 8LA2, LMS3E (for
single slot), MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S
00 to 06 20 to 26
OMU2, OMU4, OMU8, ODU2, ODU4, 09 to 0F 29 to 2F
ODU8, WDM2, ITL50, OSCAD Optional
11 to 16 30 to 36
OA (the saturation output power is 21 dB or 19 to 1E 39 to 3F
below), PA
GFF
OPM4, OPM8
OMSP, OCP
LMS3E (for double slots), LMS4E, OTU3E,
OTU3S, OTU4E, OTU4S
OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O,
OMU40_E, VMU48_O, VMU48_E,
00 to 05 20 to 25
VMU40_O, VMU40_E, ODU48_O,
09 to 0E 29 to 2E Optional. Each card
ODU48_E, ODU40_O, ODU40_E,
11 to 15 30 to 35 occupies two slots.
WSS8M, WSS8D, WSS4M, WSS4D,
19 to 1D 39 to 3E
SOAD4, SOAD8
OA (the saturation output power is 21 dB or
above), MSA, HOA, ROA, RAU_F, RAU_B
OTDR8
00 to 04 20 to 24
09 to 0D 29 to 0D Optional. Each card
OTU3F, OTU4F
11 to 14 30 to 34 occupies three slots.
19 to 1C 39 to 0D
OSC, EOSC - 3F Optional
4-16 Version: B
Table 4-5 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the OTH Subrack (Continued)

Card Name Remark
(Front) (Back)
Each NE requires at least

one EMU card. Slots 10
EMVU 10, 11 -
and 11 back up each
other.
EFCVU 10, 11 - Compulsory for the
extended subrack. Select
either the EFCVU card or
the FCVU card according
to whether the DCC
function is supported. The
FCVU 10 -
EFCVU card must be
selected when the
equipment is equipped
with the Control Plane
units.
Compulsory when the
ASCU 00, 01 - units. The card is used in
a main subrack with the
EMVU card. The two slots
back up each other.
Compulsory when the

units. The card is used in
SCU 00, 01 -
an extended subrack
installed with the EFCVU
card. The two slots back
up each other.
CTU 0F - Optional
Two PWRV cards are

configured in the subrack
PWRV F0, 18 37, 38
front and back side
respectively.
CAIF1 17 - Compulsory
CAIF2 1F - Compulsory
Version: B 4-17
Table 4-5 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the OTH Subrack (Continued)

Card Name Remark
(Front) (Back)
MXCU 07 27 Compulsory The front

MXCU and SXCU cards
work together to perform
the functions of the active
cross-connect card; the
SXCU 08 28 rear MXCU and SXCU
cards work together to
perform the functions of
the standby cross-
connect card.
Table 4-6 lists the corresponding relationships between the cards and the channel
subrack slots.
Table 4-6 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the Channel Subrack
Suitable
Card Name Remark
Slot
MST2, OTU2E, OTU2S 01 to 0E Optional
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU4S, OTU4E 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
OTU3F, OTU4F 01 to 0C Optional. Each card occupies three slots.
OMU48_O, OMU48_E, OMU40_O, OMU40_E,

VMU48_O, VMU48_E, VMU40_O, VMU40_E, 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
ODU48_O, ODU48_E, ODU40_O, ODU40_E
WSS8M, WSS8D, WSS4M, WSS4D, SOAD8 /

01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
SOAD4
ITL50, OSCAD, OMU2/4/8, ODU2/4/8, WDM2 01 to 0E Optional

01 to 0E Optional
below), PA

01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
above), MSA, HOA, ROA, RAU_F, RAU_B
OTDR8 01 to 0D Optional. Each card occupies two slots.
OCP, OMSP
GFF 01 to 0E Optional
OPM4, OPM8
OLP 06, 07 Optional
OSC, EOSC 02 Compulsory
4-18 Version: B
Table 4-6 Relationship between Cards and Slots in the Channel Subrack (Continued)
Suitable
Card Name Remark
Slot
Each NE requires at least one EMU card. Slots
EMU 00, 01
00 and 01 back up each other.
FCU 00 Compulsory for the extended subrack. Select

either the EFCU card or the FCU card according
to whether the DCC function is supported. The
EFCU 00, 01 EFCU card must be selected when the
equipment is equipped with the Control Plane
units.
Compulsory when the equipment is equipped
with the Control Plane units. The ASCU card is
ASCU 04, 05
used in a main subrack installed with the EMU
card. Slots 04 and 05 back up each other.
Compulsory when the equipment is equipped

with the Control Plane units. The SCU card is
SCU 04, 05
used in an extended subrack installed with the
EFCU card. Slots 04 and 05 back up each other.
PWR 0F Compulsory
The main subrack (the subrack is equipment with

AIF, EAIF 0E
the EMU card) is compulsory.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Adding Shelf.
Procedures
1. Click the corresponding shelf in the Physical Cfg tab and the corresponding
shelf view appears in the view pane. (The empty slots that have not been
added cards are grayed-out.)
2. Right-click an empty slot in the shelf view and select Add xx (xx is the name of
any available card for this slot and varies with the position of the slot) from the
shortcut menu, so as to add the card to the shelf. Then the slot turns blue-green.
The adding of cards in the channel subrack is shown in Figure 4-12.
Version: B 4-19
Figure 4-12 Adding a Card
4.3.9 Establishing NE Connection
The following introduces the operation procedures of establishing NE connections.
Rule of adding interfaces: The OSCAD card, OA card, PA card and OLP card are
usually used to connect with the line optical fiber. Take the OSCAD card for example.
When the OSCAD card is receiving line signals, add "I1" interface on it; when the
OSCAD card is transmitting line signals, add "O1" interface on it.
Table 4-7 Description for Adding Interfaces
Connection Connection
Interface Description
Example Description
The Tx interface on the

local end OA card The Tx interface on the The Rx interface on the
OA→PA connects to the Rx local end OA card is opposite end PA card is
interface on the O1. I1.
opposite end PA card.

opposite end OA card The Tx interface on the
The Rx interface on the
PA→OA connects to the Rx opposite end OA card
local end PA card is I1
interface on the local is O1
end PA card
4-20 Version: B
Table 4-7 Description for Adding Interfaces (Continued)
Connection Connection
Interface Description
Example Description

local end OSCAD card
connects to the Rx
interface on the
The Tx interface on the The Rx interface on the
opposite end OSCAD
OSCAD↔OS- local end OSCAD card opposite end OSCAD
card; or the Tx interface
CAD is O1 and the Rx card is I1 and the Tx
on the opposite end
interface is I1. interface is O1.
OSCAD card connects
to the Rx interface on
the local end OSCAD
card
local end OLP card The active and standby The active and standby
connects to the Rx Tx interfaces on the Rx interfaces on the
interface on the local end OLP card are opposite end OLP card
opposite end OLP card; O1 and O2 are I1 and I2
OLP↔OLP
or the Tx interface on respectively; the active respectively; the active
the opposite end OLP and standby Rx and standby Tx
card connects to the Rx interfaces are I1 and I2 interfaces are O1 and
interface on the local respectively. O2 respectively.
end OLP card
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Adding the Card.
Procedures
1. Bring out the structure configuration GUI. As shown in Figure 4-13, right-click
the project in the Logical Cfg tab and select Structure Config from the
shortcut menu. The right part of the window displays the Structure config
pane.
Version: B 4-21
Figure 4-13 Bringing up the Structure Configuration View
2. Drag the NE into the Structure config pane. Click a part and drag it into the
Structure config pane on the right, then all NEs belonging to this part are
displayed in the Structure config pane, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Dragging the NE into the Structure View
4-22 Version: B
3. View the card interfaces (take the OSCAD card as an example). Select the
corresponding bureau→rack→shelf in the Physical Cfg tab. Right-click one
OSCAD card in the shelf view and select Port config from the shortcut menu.
The Board Port config dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4-15. Interface
l1 receives the line signals and Interface O1 transmits the line signals.
Figure 4-15 The Board Port config Dialog Box
4. Complete the NE connection. In the Structure config pane, right-click NE1

and select Add Connection Line from the shortcut menu. Drag the cursor to
NE2 and click, the Add Connection Line dialog box appears as shown in
Figure 4-16. Select the card and interface for connecting the NEs. Make sure
the corresponding Tx and Rx interfaces should be connected in pair. Click OK
and the result of adding connection line is shown in Figure 4-17
Version: B 4-23
Figure 4-16 The Add Connection Line Dialog Box
Figure 4-17 Establishing NE Connection
5. Following the above procedures, complete the connections among NEs in

sequence according to the project configuration documents.
4-24 Version: B
Caution:
Establishing connection among NEs is required; otherwise, you cannot

perform the subnet cross-connect in the OTNM2000 GUI.
4.3.10 Validating Configuration Data
The following introduces the operation procedures of validating configuration data.
Prerequisites
You have completed the physical configuration, logical configuration and operations
in Establishing NE Connection.
Procedures
1. Click in the tool bar, and the OTNM2000 will check the
configuration data. The result will be displayed in the Check Config Data
dialog box.
2. Check the result in the Check Config Data dialog box.
4 The configuration data is correct: there is no red letter in the dialog box,
and the configuration data is correct, as shown in Figure 4-18.
4 The configuration data is incorrect: there are red letters in the dialog box,
and the configuration data is incorrect, as shown in Figure 4-19.
Version: B 4-25
Figure 4-18 Data Validation Being Correct
Figure 4-19 Error in Data Validation
3. If the configuration is incorrect, check and modify the configuration according to

the prompt, and redo the step 1 and 2 until the data becomes correct.
4.3.11 Saving Configuration Data
The following introduces the operation procedures of saving configuration data.
Prerequisites
You have completed operations in Validating Configuration Data.
4-26 Version: B
Procedures
1. Click in the toolbar, the devcfg alert box appears as shown in

Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20 The devcfg Prompt Box
2. Click Yes to save the current configuration data to the database.
3. Click in the toolbar, the Save As dialog box appears as shown in

Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 The Save As Dialog Box
4. Select a path and enter the file name. Click Save and save the configuration
data as a *.dcg file.
Version: B 4-27
4.3.12 Logging into the OTNM2000
Logging into the OTNM2000 to perform the operations such as configuring services,
and monitoring and querying equipment operation status.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000
Prerequisites
The network management related services and the network management database
service are all started normally.
Table 4-8 Related Services of the Network Management System and the Database
Related Services of Network Management System Related Services of Database

EMS_AuthUserRight, EMS_DataBusServer
EMS_DispServer, EMS_Dtserver
EMS_Dumper, EMS_FileServer MySQL or Informix IDS and so
EMS_FileZilla Server, EMS_Manager2 on
EMS_Monitor, EMS_MSMPServer
EMS_OtnmCfgServer, EMS_QueryServer
Procedures
1. Double-click on the network management system computer.
2. In the dialog box that appears, enter the user name and password (both are 1
by default). Select the address of the database server to be logged in and click
OK, as shown in Figure 4-22. A successful login brings up the OTNM2000 main
screen.
4-28 Version: B
Figure 4-22 The OTNM2000 Login Info Dialog Box
Version: B 4-29
5 Commissioning for A Single Station
The following introduces the commissioning items, methods and procedures for the
FONST 5000 at a single station.
Flow of Equipment Commissioning at A Single Station
Confirming Hardware Installation
Powering on Equipment
Connecting Equipment to the OTM2000
Commissioning Equipment Optical Power
Configuring Intelligent Fan
Setting the Expected Value for the Amplification Card
Example of Optical Power Commissioning at A Single Station
Version: B 5-1
5.1 Flow of Equipment Commissioning at A

Single Station
Figure 5-1 shows the flow of commissioning a single station.
Figure 5-1 Flow Chart for Equipment Commissioning at A Single Station
5-2 Version: B
5.2 Confirming Hardware Installation
Before equipment commissioning, you need to inspect all the hardware items
installed as introduced in the Installation Guide and remove possible silent failures
generated in the process of hardware installation, so as to guarantee smooth
equipment commissioning.
If any hardware item is found to disagree with the requirements on installation, a

proposal for modification should be put forward in a timely manner. The
commissioning should only be performed after the hardware items fully meet the
requirements.
5.2.1 Requirements on Hardware Inspection
Hardware installation should be inspected from five aspects: equipment room

conditions, cabinet installation, equipment installation, layout of optical fibers and
layout of electrical cables. Make sure the requirements on the aforesaid five aspects
are fully met so as to guarantee the normal commissioning of the equipment.
Below are the general requirements on hardware installation, for specific standards
for each item, please refer to the Installation Guide.
Requirements on Equipment Room Conditions
u Inspect the equipment room conditions, and make sure that
4 The equipment room is kept dry inside.
4 The route and specifications of the bottom wiring channels accord with the
construction drawings. The cover plates are tight and secure. The bottom
wiring channels are free of leakage.
4 The mains supply has been introduced to the equipment room, and the
lighting fixtures are working normally.
4 The temperature control equipment can work normally; the indoor

temperature and humidity can meet the requirements of the equipment.
4 The work on the lightning earth ground, protection earth ground, working
earth ground and leading cables have been completed and accepted. The
grounding resistance meets the requirements of construction drawings.
Version: B 5-3
u The equipment room should be provided with effective firefighting facilities;

dangerous articles such as inflammable and explosive should be kept away
from the equipment room.
u The equipment room should be kept clean and tidy. The abandoned packing
boxes should all be removed from the room. The redundant spare components
that are left after installation should be handed over to and kept properly by
relevant personnel from the operator.
Requirements on Cabinet Installation
u The installation position of the cabinet should accord with the construction
drawing.
u The cabinet should be installed upright and securely, with vertical deviation no
more than 3mm.
u The rows of cabinets at the side of the main walkway should be aligned in a line
with deviation no more than 5mm. The neighboring cabinets should be
arranged close to each other.
u The cabinet bottom should be secured to the ground / floor with expansion bolts
or wooden bolts; the cabinet top should be secured to the upper support
channel with the top-connection bracket plate.
u All bolts should be tightened. For the same type of bolts, the length of the part
extruding the nut should be consistent.
u The ESD protection wrist strap should be connected to the ESD protection
earth ground fastener on the cabinet.
Requirements on Equipment Installation
u The cards can be plugged or unplugged smoothly; the idle slots have been
installed with dummy panels correctly.
u Wires and cables at each interface (such as the F interface and ALM interface)
of the equipment have been correctly connected.
u The buttons (such as the RING OFF button and CUT button) on the card can
be pressed down and released normally.
u The fans and anti-dust screen of the equipment have been properly installed.
5-4 Version: B
Requirements on Layout of Optical Fibers
u Lay the optical fiber jumpers.
4 The route of the optical fiber jumpers accords with the design.
4 The redundancy on both ends of the optical fiber jumpers should be

uniform and meet the technical requirements.
4 The bend radius of optical fiber jumpers in the wiring channel is no less
than 38mm.
4 Do not put any article, including the electrical cable, on the optical fiber
jumpers.
u When you are binding optical fiber jumpers, make sure that
4 Optical fiber jumpers in the channel are protected by the protection casing
or dedicated channel. The part without protection casing is noosed with
fiber binders loosely.
4 The bound optical fiber jumpers are straight in the channel without twist.
Requirements on Layout of Electrical Cables
u The wiring routing, number and layout position of the cables such as the power
cables and the protection earth ground cables should be in compliance with the
project design documents. The specifications of the power cables and the
capacity of the fuses should comply with the design requirements.
u The power cables and the protection earth ground cables should be made of a
continuous segment of copper core with no intermediate connections. The
insulation layer is intact and in good condition.
u The feed cables of the AC and DC power supplies should be arranged

separately. The power cable, signal cable, subscriber cable and trunk cable
should be arranged separately. The recommended spacing for these cables is
more than 5 cm.
u When the protection earth ground cables and the power cables are connected
to the power cabinet, the cable remainder has to be cut off and is not allowed to
be coiled or bent repeatedly.
Version: B 5-5
u The wire nose ends and bare wires of the power and the protection earth
ground cables are wrapped with casing tubes or insulating tapes. No copper
wire is exposed at the wire noses or connectors. The flat washers and locking
spring washers are installed correctly.
u When the optical cable is led into the cabinet, its reinforced metal core must
connect with the lightning-proof ground separately and should not share the
protection earth ground cables with the equipment.
5.2.2 Checking Subrack Address
Configuration Requirements
Location of the subrack address DIP switch For instance, an NE includes three
FONST 5000 subracks, and the subracks’ corresponding start slot numbers on the
network management system are 00, 40 and 80; then you should set the subrack
addresses of the ID6 and ID7 to 00, 01 and 10 respectively.
Location of the Subrack Address DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located near the Slot 0F on the subrack backplane. Unplug the
card from the Slot 0F, and you will find the switch.
Introduction to the Subrack Address DIP Switch
This DIP switch consists of four bits. Each bit can be set to the OFF or ON positions,
indicating binary numbers 1 or 0 respectively. For the FONST 5000 switch only has
ID6 and ID7 which are valid. For the locations of ID6 and ID7, see the silk print on
the back panel.
See Table 5-1 for the descriptions of the FONST 5000 subrack address switches.
Table 5-1 Descriptions of the Subrack Address Switches
DIP Switch Value (ID7 / ID6) Starting Slot Number of the Subrack
00 00
01 40
10 80
11 C0
5-6 Version: B
5.2.3 Cascading the Main Subrack and Extended Subracks
When a WDM station is equipped with a main subrack and several extended
subracks, the main subrack is configured with the EMVU card, and the extended
subracks are configured with the FCVU / FCU / EFCVU / EFCU cards. You can
cascade these subracks via network cables, so as to enable exchange of the
management plane and control plane information among the subracks.
5.2.3.1 Interconnection of Management Plane Supervisory

Information
Interconnection of the management plane supervisory information enables the

normal communication between NEs and the network management system.
Interconnection of the management plane supervisory information includes the

information interconnection between cards and the information interconnection
between NEs.
u Information interconnection between cards: the EMVU / EMU card of the main
subrack supervises all cards inside the subrack.
u Information interconnection between subracks: the EMS information collected

by the extended subracks is sent to the network management system via the
main subrack.
Interconnection of the management plane information is mainly implemented

between the EMVU / EMU card, FCVU / FCU card, EFCVU / EFCU card of the
subracks.
Procedures
1. Information interconnection between cards: connect the COM ports on the

FCVU / FCU / EFCVU / EFCU card of each extended subrack to the
corresponding COM ports (COM1 to COM4) on the CAIF1 / CAIF2 card, COM
(COM1 to COM3) on the AIF card, COM1 port on the EAIF card or the COM
port on the EMVU / EMU card of the main subrack, as illustrated in Figure 5-2.
Version: B 5-7
2. Information interconnection between subracks: cascade the ETH (ETH3 / ETH4)

port on the EFCVU / EFCU card of the extended subrack and the ETH (ETH3 /
ETH4) port on the EMVU / EMU card of the main subrack; or cascade the ETH
(ETH3 / ETH4) port on the EFCU card of the extended subrack and the F1 / F2
port on the CAIF1 / CAIF2 / AIF / EAIF card of the main subrack.
Note:
u Usually, the main subrack is configured with the CAIF1 / CAIF2 / AIF
/ EAIF cards; and the extended subrack is configured with the FCVU
/ FCU card or the EFCVU / EFCU card.
u The FCVU / FCU card does not process the information between
subracks, so it is unnecessary to connect the FCVU / FCU card in
this case.
Operation Example
Figure 5-2 shows that a station is equipped with two WDM subracks and one OTH
subrack. See the management plane information interconnection diagram below.
Because the ETH port of the EMVU card and the F1/ F2 port on the CAIF1 / CAIF2
card are interconnected via the subrack back panel, the line 1 in the figure can also
be connected to the ETH3 / ETH4 on the EMVU card.
5-8 Version: B
Figure 5-2 Interconnection of Management Plane Monitoring Information
5.2.3.2 Interconnection of Control Plane Supervisory Information
Interconnection of the control plane supervisory information enables normal

exchange of the control plane information between subracks in an NE.
If an NE is equipped with the control plane, then the control plane information
interconnection between subracks in the NE should be enabled by connecting
relevant ports on the ASCU and SCU cards of the corresponding subracks.
Version: B 5-9
Procedures
1. Cascade the SETH1 / SETH2 ports on both the SCU card of the extended
subrack and the ASCU card of the main subrack; or cascade the SETH1 /
SETH2 port on the SCU card of the extended subrack and the ETH1 / ETH2
port on the AIF / EAIF card or the SETH1 / SETH2 port on the CAIF1 / CAIF2
card of the main subrack.
Operation Example
For example, a station is equipped with two WDM subracks and one OTH subrack.
See the control plane monitoring information interconnection diagram in Figure 5-3.
Because the SETH1 / SETH2 port on the ASCU card are interconnected with the
SETH1 / SETH2 port on the CAIF1 / CAIF2 card, the Line 1 in the figure can also be
connected to the SETH1 / SETH2 port on the ASCU card.
5-10 Version: B
Figure 5-3 Interconnection of Control Plane Monitoring Information
5.2.4 Inspecting Optical Cables
The attenuation of optical cable line should meet the requirements of design, and
the difference between the attenuations of optical cable line in the Rx and Tx
directions should be less than 1/20 of the line attenuation.
Prerequisites
u The optical cables have been laid out properly.
Version: B 5-11
u Project engineers are present on both ends of the optical cable line section to
be tested.
Tool / Instrument
Optical power meter, light source
Procedures
1. Test the optical fiber attenuation of Line 1, as illustrated in Figure 5-4. Connect
the light source and optical power meter to the ODFs at Station A and Station B
corresponding to Line 1 respectively.
Figure 5-4 Checking the Line Optical Power
2. Record the transmitting optical power of the light source at Station A and the
receiving optical power of the optical power meter at Station B respectively.
Note:
u Adjust the wavelength of both the light source and the optical power
meter to 1550nm.
u Properly set the transmitting optical power of the light source

according to the designed line attenuation.
3. Calculate the actual attenuation of Line 1 as per the formula: Line attenuation =
the Tx optical power of the light source - the Rx optical power of the optical
power meter. For example, if the Tx optical power of the light source is +10
dBm and the Rx optical power of the optical power meter is -14 dBm, then the
line attenuation = 10 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 24 dBm.
5-12 Version: B
4. Compare the actual optical fiber attenuation of Line 1 with the designed
attenuation in the project. The actual line attenuation should not exceed the
designed attenuation by 3dB or more. If the optical fiber attenuation fails to
meet the aforesaid requirements, make adjustment accordingly until the
requirements are met.
5. Test the optical fibers on Line 2 in the same way to see whether they meet the
aforesaid requirements.
6. Compare the optical fiber attenuation values of Line 1 and Line 2. The
attenuations of optical fibers in each section of the same optical cable in the Rx
and Tx directions should be basically the same. For example, if the actual
attenuation of the optical fibers on a line is 24dB, then the difference between
the optical fiber attenuations in the Rx and Tx directions should be less than
1.2dB.
4 If the difference between the fiber core attenuations in the Rx and Tx

directions exceed one twentieth of the line attenuation, you should check
the optical fiber connection.
4 If the difference between the fiber core attenuations in the Rx and Tx

directions exceed 2/20 of the line attenuation, you should modify the
optical cables as required.
Subsequent Operation
If the optical fibers on the line meet the requirements for commissioning, record the
test results after inspection. This record will be taken as the reference for later-stage
commissioning and maintenance.
5.3 Powering on Equipment
The following introduces the power-on procedures for the FONST 5000.
5.3.1 Checking the Fuse Threshold Current of Power Supply
The fuse threshold current of the power supply should be able to guarantee the
normal operation of all devices housed in the cabinet when both the cabinet and the
devices are fully populated.
Version: B 5-13
Given that a 2.2-meter-high cabinet is fully populated with one OTH subrack and
one WDM subrack, its maximum power consumption will be 4000W. Then the
external power supply suitable to this cabinet should support the fuse threshold
current of higher than 100A.
5.3.2 Checking the Power Supply Equipment’s Output

Voltage
Check whether the output voltage of the power supply equipment (such as the the
head of row cabinet) is within the normal range.
Prerequisites
Make sure all the branch power switches on the PDP at the cabinet top are put to
the OFF position.
Tool / Instrument
Multimeter
Procedure
1. Measure the voltage on both ends of the output terminals of the external power
supply (the head of row cabinet) with a multimeter.
2. Record the measured value.
3. It is required that the output voltage of the external power supply (the head of
row cabinet) should range between -40V and -57V. If the output voltage of the
external power supply is out of this range, take measures accordingly until the
output voltage meets the requirement. Do not power on the equipment before
the requirements are met.
5.3.3 Powering on the Cabinet
The FONST 5000 uses a -48V DC power supply. The voltage ranges from -40V to
-57V.
5-14 Version: B
Prerequisites
u Confirm that the cabinet power cable is correctly connected with the external
power supply.
u Place all branch power switches on the PDP in the OFF position.
u The power cable connectors of all subracks have been unplugged.
u Disconnect all cards inside the subrack but leave them on their slots.
Tool / Instrument
Multimeter
Procedure
1. Measure the voltage between the external power -48V input terminal A and the
GND terminal on the PDP. The normal voltage value should ranges from -40V
to -57V.
2. Measure the voltage between the external power -48V input terminal B and the
GND terminal on the PDP. The normal voltage value should ranges from -40V
to -57V.
3. If the voltage values measured in Step 1 and Step 2 fail to meet the
requirements, installers should check and commission the power supply
equipment and power supply cables until the output voltage values meet the
requirements.
4. Place the branch switches on the PDP in the ON position.
5. Measure the voltage between the -48V terminal and the 0V terminal of the
power cable connectors of each subrack respectively. The measured value
should be between -40V and -57V.
6. After the cabinet power-on test is completed, place the branch switches on the
PDP in the OFF position.
5.3.4 Powering on Subrack
Connecting with the subrack power supply can ensure the normal operation of the
equipment.
Version: B 5-15
Prerequisites
u The power-on testing of the cabinet has been completed.
u The power cable connectors of all subracks have been unplugged.
u Disconnect all cards inside the subrack but leave them on their slots.
Tool / Instrument
Multimeter
Procedure
1. Plug the active and standby PWRV / PWR cards into the subrack.
2. Insert the connectors of the active and standby subrack power cables into the
DC power interfaces on the active and standby PWRV / PWR cards of the
subrack respectively.
3. Place all branch switches on the front panel of the PDP to the ON position.
4. After confirming that the subrack has no abnormal sound or smell, plug in the
fan unit. The fan unit will start running as soon as it is plugged and air
movement around it will begin.
5. Plug the cards into the subrack in sequence, and the cards will be powered on
normally in two or three minutes. The ACT LED (green) on each card should
blink fast after the card is powered on.
5.4 Connecting Equipment to the OTM2000
Set up the information channel between the equipment and the network
management system, so that the network management system could learn of the
working status, current alarms and current performance of the equipment in a timely
manner, and instruct the maintenance personnel to implement service configuration
and equipment maintenance correctly and efficiently.
Primary condition for connecting the equipment to the network management

system: configure the NE IP address for each station according to planning. The NE
IP addresses can be configured in two modes: the DIP switch mode, the LCT (Local
Craft Terminal) mode and the SN based remote mode.
5-16 Version: B
5.4.1 DIP Switch Mode
When the NE uses the WDM subrack as the main subrack, and the NE does not
require domain division, the DIP switch mode is used. Refer to Instruction to DIP
Switches on the EMU Card for the DIP switches on the EMU card.
5.4.2 LCT Mode
When the NE uses the WDM subrack only but the NE requires domain division, the
LCT mode is used.
5.4.2.1 Installing EMS Monitoring Software
Install the special EMS monitoring software in the portable computer (skip this step
if the software is already installed). Refer to Optical Fiber Communication
Equipment Operation Terminal (EOT) Operation Manual for the functions,
installation environment, installation methods and the operation methods of the
EMS monitoring software.
5.4.2.2 Connecting Serial Interface Monitoring Cable
Connect the AIF / EAIF card’s f interface and the PC’s serial port via the LCT
monitoring cable. This monitoring cable is a universal serial interface connection
cable. You can refer to the definition of the f interface terminal described in
Hardware Description to make one.
Note:
Do not plug / unplug the serial interface connection cable at the PC side
while it is powered, or the serial interface on the PC may be destroyed.
5.4.2.3 Logging in Monitoring System
Prerequisites
u The LCT system has been successfully installed on a portable computer.
Version: B 5-17
u The configured serial number for the COM interface of the LCT system should
be consistent with that allocated to the interface on the portable computer that
is connected to the serial interface cable.
u The communication mode of the LCT system has been configured to serial
interface mode.
Note:
u To configure the serial number for the COM interface of the LCT
system, you should open the "Dms" and "Dms_en" documents under
the "C:\EMS_f" directory (the installation directory of the LCT). The
documents should be opened in form of the notepad.
u To configure the communication mode of the LCT system, you

should open the "Fun_cn" and "Fun_en" documents under the "C:
\EMS_f" directory (the installation directory of the LCT). Under
"[COMMUNICATIONTYPE]", "TYPE=0" means the serial interface
mode is selected; "TYPE=1" means the Ethernet mode is selected.
Procedures
1. Start the PC, then double-click the icon for LCT on the desktop to access
the main window of the monitoring system.
2. Click System Operation→EMS User Login in the main menu, and enter the
user name and password.
Note:
The default user name and password are both abc3, which are not case
sensitive.
3. Click the broadcast time calibration icon to synchronize the time on the
equipment and on the EMS.
5-18 Version: B
5.4.2.4 Configuring IP Protocol Stack Parameters
The correct IP protocol stack parameter configuration enables the normal

communication between the NE and the network management system.
Prerequisites
Planning for the NE IP addresses and the network block number and NE number of
each station has been completed.
Procedures
1. Set the DIP switches of the EMU card.
4 Set the special bits: set the K1-3 (the 3rd bit of the DIP switch K1) on the
EMU card to ON.
4 Set K5 and K6: the setting of K5 and K6 should be consistent with the
setting of the EMU Switch (HEX) item in the LCT Manage Config window.
For instance, if K5 and K6 are set to 00111111 and 11111110 respectively,
the EMU Switch (HEX) should be set to 3F and FE respectively. Make sure
that the settings of K5 and K6 on the EMU card in each NE in a project are
different from each other.
Note:
For all DIP switches of the EMU card, "OFF" stands for "valid", which
means "OFF" equals "1" and "ON" equals "0".
2. Click Sub Network→Manage Config in the main menu of the LCT monitoring
system, the Manage Config dialog box appears as shown in Figure 5-5.
Version: B 5-19
Figure 5-5 The devcfg Dialog Box
3. Set the parameters of the local NE according to the notes marked in Figure 5-5;
for the configuration items that are not marked, keep their default settings.
4. Set items in the Other tab: Access the Other tab. Enter the hexadecimal
values corresponding to K5 and K6 of the EMU card in the Current Switch (HEX)
text box; for the other items, keep their default settings, as illustrated in
Figure 5-6.
5-20 Version: B
Figure 5-6 Configuring the Other Tab
Note:
The configuration of the Current Switch (HEX) shown in Figure 5-6 and
the configuration of the EMU Switch (Hex) shown in Figure 5-5 should be
consistent with the configuration of K5 and K6 of the EMU card.
Version: B 5-21
5. Return to the EMU config tab shown in Figure 5-5, and click the Send button.
Thus an alert box for successful delivery of configuration data will appear,
indicating that IP protocol stack parameters of the NE are modified
successfully.
Note:
When the NE is configured with both the active and standby EMU cards,
you need only to configure and deliver the IP address of the active EMU
card. The standby EMU card will be synchronized with the active EMU
card in IP address automatically after being powered on, and requires no
configuration.
5.4.3 Configuring IP Using SN Remote Mode
When the FONST 5000 OTH subrack is used, configure the NE IP settings for the
entire network via the OTNM2000 based on SN remotely.
5.4.3.1 SN Related Knowledge
SN (Serial Number) refers to the software registration code information, usually

used as the filename of the registration code.
The FONST 5000’s EMVU card uses the 12-bit SN serial code, which is very similar
to the MAC address of the PC and is also unique in the entire network. The serial
number has been downloaded into the EMVU card before delivery.
Using the SN based remote EMS configuration, the user can complete the IP
address settings of all equipment in the entire network via the directly-connected
NEs (the local NEs), so as to increase the commissioning efficiency. See Figure 5-7
for the configuration procedure.
5-22 Version: B
Figure 5-7 Flowchart of the SN-based Remote EMS Configuration
5.4.3.2 Configuring Local NE IP Address
The mapping from the local NE IP address to SN has been completed.
Prerequisites
You have completed the network topology.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000
Version: B 5-23
Procedures
1. Double-click on the ONTM2000 server desktop to bring up the Devcfg

window.
2. Click the button in the tool bar to bring up the User Login dialog
box.
3. Enter user name and password (both are 1 by default) in the User Login dialog
box and click the Login button.
4. Click Advanced→NE IP Remote Config on the menu bar to access the NE IP

Remote Config window, as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 The NE Remote IP Config Window
5. Set the local NE: Click the NE and click Config→Select as the Local NE on
the menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-9.
5-24 Version: B
Figure 5-9 Configuring Local NE
Note:
If there are several entries in Figure 5-9, you can set only one NE as the
local NE; that is, there is only one NE whose Source NE IP Address is
shown as -.
6. Query the SN of the local NE: Click Operation→Query the local NE SN on the
menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Version: B 5-25
Figure 5-10 Querying the Local NE SN
Note:
If there are several local NEs connected with the OTNM2000 server via
the HUB, the SN to be queried is random. You have to confirm the
corresponding equipment of the SN according to the SN label on the
panel of the EMU card or the EMVU card.
7. Set the local NE IP settings: According to Table 5-2, double-click the

parameter fields related to the local NE IP, as shown in Figure 5-11.
5-26 Version: B
Figure 5-11 Configuring Local NE IP Parameters
8. Deliver configuration: Click Operation→Set Local NE IP Config on the menu

bar, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Configuring Local NE IP Address
Version: B 5-27
Note:
u As soon as the NE IP is written successfully, the EMVU card of the

NE will automatically be reset. And the process takes approximately
2 minutes.
u After that you will log into the OTNM2000, then ping the NE.
4 If the ping is successful, the IP of the EMVU card is written
successfully.
4 If the ping fails, users need to check the physical connection
between the NE and the EMS and the NE configuration. For the
details, refer to Troubleshooting Guide.
9. Save the IP settings of the local NE: Click on the toolbar to save local NE
IP and switch relevant settings, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Saving the IP Parameters of the Local NE
Note:
After saving, you can query the IP address, switch and other relevant
information in the NE Property dialog box.
Parameter Reference
See Table 5-2 for the NE IP settings.
5-28 Version: B
Table 5-2 NE IP Settings
Item Description
SN Retain the default value and no modification is required.
For the local NE, this item displays the part number and the NE number
stored in the database.
Object For the remote end NE, this item automatically displays the part number
and the NE number in the adjacent SN discovery sequence.
The NE numbers increase in sequence.
SN of EMU
SN of the EMVU card
equipment
For the local NE, this item displays -. For other adjacent NEs, this item
displays the NE IP address of its discovered adjacent NE.
Source NE address For example, if NE1 is the local NE, its IP address is 10.18.1.1, and
NE2 is the adjacent NE to the NE1, the Source NE Address of NE2 is
10.18.1.1.
Switch 1 and Switch 2 are the NE identifiers and their combination must
be unique in the entire network.
Switch 1 / 2
Normally Switch 1 and Switch 2 correspond to the 3rd and 4th byte of
the NE IP address respectively.
Set to Default Domain or Non-default Domain.

u Default Domain: The first two bytes of the IP address are the
associated domain ID. All ports of the NE are associated to the
Default domain domain. Usually the access layer and the convergence layer NEs
identifier are set to Default Domain.
u Non-default Domain: The user must complete the extension
domain, extension domain port and other settings in the Extension
Domain Config dialog box.
The NE IP address, which must be unique in the entire network.

Because the local NE and the EMS computer are connected via
IP address network cables, the NE IP address and the computer IP address must
be in the same subnet, otherwise the discovery of subsequent adjacent
NE SNs will be affected.
IP mask 255.255.255.0
IP gateway No settings are required.
Configuration is required when the Default Domain Identifier is set to

Non-default Domain.
Extension domain
Click the right button of this item to bring up the Extension Domain
config
Config dialog box. Add extension domain, set the domain address and
set the port number of this domain.
Note 1: The items not included in this table use the default values.
Version: B 5-29
5.4.3.3 Configuring Adjacent NE IP Address
Complete the mapping between the remote NE IP address and the SN.
Prerequisites
u You have completed the local NE IP address configuration.
u The DCC or GCC of the local and adjacent NE is reachable.
Note:
You can check whether the connection with the adjacent NE is set up by
viewing the monitoring status of the EMVU card of the local NE. Refer to
Card Configuration Parameter Reference for details about the
configuration items.
Tool / Instrument
OTNM2000
Procedure
1. Refer to Step1 to Step 4 in Configuring Local NE IP Address to access the NE

Remote IP Config window.
2. Obtain the SN of the adjacent NE: Click Operation→Get Neighbor NE by SN

on the menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-14.
5-30 Version: B
Figure 5-14 Obtaining the Adjacent NE SN
3. Set the IP parameters of the adjacent NE: Refer to Step 7 in Configuring Local
NE IP Address to set the IP address, switch and other relevant parameters, as
Figure 5-15 Configuring Adjacent NE IP Parameters
4. Deliver IP configuration of the adjacent NE: Click Operation→Set Remote NE

IP Config on the menu bar, as shown in Figure 5-16.
Version: B 5-31
Figure 5-16 Configuring Adjacent NE IP Settings
Note:
u As soon as the NE IP is written successfully, the EMVU card of the

NE will automatically be reset. And the process takes approximately
2 minutes.
u After that you will log into the OTNM2000, then ping the NE.
4 If the ping is successful, the IP of the EMVU card is written
successfully.
4 If the ping fails, check the configuration data of the NE and the
hardware. For the details, refer to Troubleshooting Guide.
5. Save the IP parameters of the adjacent NE: Refer to Step 9 in Configuring

Local NE IP Address to save the IP address, switch and other relevant
parameters,.
5-32 Version: B
Note:
After saving, you can query the IP address, switch and other relevant
information in the NE Property dialog box.
5.4.4 Supervisory Channel
Two kinds of supervisory channels are provided between equipment at different

stations.
u OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel): the OSC card is used to transmit and
receive the monitoring information. The OSC is set up via the OSC card
commissioning.
u ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel): the monitoring information is transmitted

via the overhead bytes of the OTU card. For setting up an ESC, you need only
to enable the GCC Path function for the OTU cards on both the local and far
ends after the OTU cards are connected and services are normal (or the OTU
card’s wavelength division side is transmitting optical signals).
5.4.5 Checking DCC Indicator LED
Check whether the DCC of the equipment is expedited via observing the status of
the DCC indicator LED.
Check the DCC indicator LED to narrow the reasons why the NE fails to connect
with the OTNM2000.
u If the indicators DCCE, DCCW, or indicator LEDs 1 to 28 of GCC on the EMU

card panel are blinking, the EMU card may be faulty or the IP address of the
EMU card is configured incorrectly.
u If the indicators DCCE, DCCW, or indicator LEDs 1 to 28 of GCC on the EMU

card panel are not blinking, the line is faulty.
Version: B 5-33
Prerequisites
u The optical fibers on the line have been correctly connected.
u Optical fibers inside the equipment cabinet have been correctly connected.
Procedures (DCC Indicators)
1. When the NE under commissioning is equipped with the OSC card, check
whether the DCCE and DCCW indicators on the panel of the EMVU / EMU card
are blinking. If the optical fibers are connected unidirectionally on the line, make
sure only the indicators corresponding to the direction of the connected optical
fibers blink.
Procedures (GCC Indicators)
1. If the NE under commissioning is not configured with an OSC card, but

equipped with the OTU card or a line card, check the indicators 1 to 28 of GCC
on the EMVU / EMU card panel. Refer to Association between GCC and Slot
for the association between the GCC indicators and the slots.
Note:
If the GCC indicators fail to blink normally, you can log in the NE under
commissioning via the LCT to check the monitoring status of the EMVU/
EMU card and check whether the GCC types on both ends are
consistent. Refer to Card Configuration Parameter Reference for details
about the configuration items.
5.4.6 Delivering the Management Configuration
Deliver the management configuration and set up the communication between the
network management system and the equipment, so that the network management
system could monitor the current alarms and current performance of the NE
normally
Prerequisites
You have logged in the OTNM2000 GUI.
5-34 Version: B
Procedure
1. Right-click the NE whose configuration data are to be delivered. Select the ping
command from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the ping command
window.
2. Ascertain whether the equipment can be pinged.
4 If the information such as Reply from X. X. X. X: bytes=32 time<10ms

TTL=64 is displayed in the ping demand window, the NE can be pinged, i.e.
the communication between the network management system and the NE
is normal.
4 However, if request timed out is displayed in the ping command window,

the NE cannot be pinged. That is, the communication between the network
management system and the NE is faulty. In this case, you need to check
whether the line between the network management system and the NE is
unblocked, whether a DCC route-related card (such as the EMU card and
OSC card) is faulty, and whether the NE IP address is correctly configured.
3. Right-click the network block whose configuration data are to be delivered, and
select Time Calibration from the shortcut menu that appears.
4. Click Yes (Y) in the time calibration dialog box that occurs.
5. Right-click the network block whose configuration data are to be delivered, and
select Download Management Config (M) from the shortcut menu that
appears.
6. Click Yes (Y) in the management configuration dialog box that appears.
Version: B 5-35
Note:
u After successful management configuration delivery, the EMU /

EMVU card that can ping the NE within the network block will be
automatically reset.
u The reset NE can communicate with the network management

system normally, and you can query the current alarms and
performance of the NE via the network management system.
u If an NE fails to connect with the network management system, you

need to replace the EMU card of this NE. Refer to Troubleshooting
Guide for troubleshooting.
5.5 Commissioning Equipment Optical Power
Before activating system services, you need to commission the optical power of
equipment at a single station and connect the optical fibers between card interfaces
and optical fibers between equipment and the ODF.
Different cards have different requirements on commissioning. Commissioning for

different cards will be introduced below respectively.
5.5.1 Tributary Interface Card
u Client-side input optical power: it is required that the input optical power at the
optical interfaces of the tributary card is within the range from (sensitivity value
plus 3) dBm to (overload value minus 5) dBm. For instance, if the overload
value at the optical interface of the 8TA1 card is 0 dBm and the Rx sensitivity
value at the interface is -18 dBm, then the input optical power of this optical
interface should be kept within -15 dBm to -5 dBm after the commissioning.
u Client-side output optical power: no commissioning is required.
5-36 Version: B
Note:
u Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for the overload and

sensitivity values of the optical interfaces on the tributary interface
cards.
u Add an attenuator (with attenuation value from 5dBm to 8dBm) at the

input optical interface of the tributary card before commissioning if
you are not sure about the input optical power value. By doing so,
you are able to prevent the card from being damaged by possible
over high Rx optical power.
5.5.2 Line Interface Card
u Wavelength division side input optical power: adjust the input optical power at
the optical interfaces of the line card to the range between (sensitivity value
plus 3dBm) to (overload value minus 5 dBm). For instance, if the overload
value at the optical interface of the LMS2E card is 0 dBm and the Rx sensitivity
value at the interface is -17 dBm, then the Rx optical power at this optical
interface should be kept within -14 dBm to -5 dBm.
u Wavelength division side output optical power: different WDM systems have
different requirements on commissioning of the line card.
4 For the N×10Gbit/s system: the Rx optical power of the line card is
required to be -2dBm.
4 For the N×10Gbit/s and N×40Gbit/s hybrid transmission system: the output
optical power of the line card is required to be -5dBm (G652 optical fiber)
or -6dBm (G655 optical fiber).
4 For the N×40Gbit/s system: the Rx optical power of the line card is
required to be -1dBm.
4 For the N×100Gbit/s system: the difference of the output optical power of
line cards should be less than 4dB. After being multiplexed and amplified,
each wavelength signal should comply with the incident optical power
requirements of the WDM system single channel.
Version: B 5-37
Table 5-3 Incident Optical Power Requirements of Single Channel
Average Incident Optical Power of

system Optical fiber
Single Channel
G.652 1 dBm
N×22dB
G.655 0 dBm
N×100Gbit/s
G.652 2 dBm
N×25dB
G.655 1 dBm
Note 1: The incident optical power of single channel indicates the optical power of the single
wavelength signal at the MPI-SM point or the SM point when accessing the optical fiber.
Note:
u Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for the overload and

sensitivity values of the optical interfaces on the line interface cards.
u Add an attenuator (with attenuation value from 5dBm to 8dBm) at the

input optical interface of the line card before commissioning if you
are not sure about the input optical power value. By doing so, you
are able to prevent the card from being damaged by possible over
high Rx optical power.
5.5.3 Optical Transponder Card
Client-side Optical Interfaces
Commission these interfaces with reference to the commissioning requirements in

Tributary Interface Card.
Wavelength Division Side Optical Interface
Commission these interfaces with reference to the commissioning requirements in

Line Interface Card.
5-38 Version: B
Note:
Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for the overload and

sensitivity values of the optical interfaces on the optical transponder
cards.
5.5.4 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
VMU Series Cards
u You need to adjust the input power of each single wavelength and test the
channel insertion loss value when commissioning the optical power of the VUM
series cards.
u Test the channel insertion loss of each single wavelength. Make sure the test
values meet the card specifications and make a record of the test values.
Note:
u The channel insertion loss is the difference between the power at the
single wavelength input port (such as the 01 port) and the power at
the OUT port. Make sure the optical fibers at the other input ports
(such as the ports from 02 to 48) are disconnected before the test.
u Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for the insertion loss

indexes for VMU series cards.
u In system commissioning, you can set the single-wavelength attenuation

values for the VMU card via the network management system. Meanwhile, you
can set the VOA adjustment control mode to manual in the card control
command GUI to adjust the flatness of the channel optical power. Refer to
Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel for operation procedures.
Version: B 5-39
OMU Series Cards
Optical power commissioning requirements for the OMU series cards are the same
with those for VMU series cards. While commissioning channel optical power, you
need increase / reduce the quantity of fixed optical attenuators on the line card or
OTU card to adjust the single-channel input power of the OMU series cards.
Note:
Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for the insertion loss
indexes for OMU series cards.
ODU Series Cards
While commissioning optical power for ODU series cards, you need test parameters
such as the insertion loss of ODU series cards to see whether they meet
requirements. The insertion loss test methods for ODU series cards are similar with
those for VMU cards. Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for relevant
parameters of ODU cards.
WDM2 Card
Make sure the optical fiber connection between the WDM2 card and relevant cards
is correct, and test whether the insertion loss of the WDM2 card meet the
requirements below:
u The insertion loss of the LINE_I interface→MAIN_O interface＝the input optical

power at the LINE_I interface - the output optical power at the MAIN_O
interface. The deviation should be no more than 0.4dB.
u The insertion loss of the MAIN_I interface→LINE_O interface＝the input optical

power at the MAIN_I interface - the output optical power at the LINE_O
Caution:
The input optical power at the MAIN_I interface should be tested when
the optical fibers at the OTDR_I interface are disconnected.
5-40 Version: B
u The insertion loss of the LINE_I interface→OTDR_O interface＝the input

optical power at the LINE_I interface - the output optical power at the OTDR_O
u The insertion loss of the OTDR_I interface→LINE_O interface＝the input

optical power at the OTDR_I interface - the output optical power at the LINE_O
Caution:
The input optical power at the OTDR_I interface should be tested when
the optical fibers at the MAIN_I interface are disconnected.
OSCAD Card
Make sure the optical fiber connection between the OSCAD card and relevant cards
is correct, and test whether the insertion loss of the OSCAD card meet the
requirements below:
u The insertion loss of the LINE_I interface→MAIN_D interface＝the input optical

power at the LINE_I interface - the output optical power at the MAIN_D
u The insertion loss of the MAIN_A interface→LINE_O interface＝the input

optical power at the MAIN_A interface - the output optical power at the LINE_O
Caution:
The input optical power at the MAIN_A interface should be tested when
the optical fibers at the OSC_A interface are disconnected.
u The insertion loss of the LINE_I interface→OSC_D interface＝the input optical

power at the LINE_I interface - the output optical power at the OSC_D interface.
The deviation should be no more than 0.4dB.
u The insertion loss of the OSC_A interface→LINE_O interface＝the input optical

power at the OSC_A interface - the output optical power at the LINE_O
Version: B 5-41
Caution:
The input optical power at the OSC_A interface should be tested when
the optical fibers at the MAIN_A interface are disconnected.
ITL50 Card
u Make sure the optical fiber connection between the ITL50 card and relevant
cards is correct, and test whether the insertion loss of the ITL50 card meet the
requirements. Refer to Common Commissioning Parameter for relevant
specifications of the card.
u While adjusting the channel optical power, you need check whether the
difference of average output optical power between the odd number
wavelengths and even number wavelengths is excessive.
Note:
Adjust the CE and CO buttons on the ITL50 card panel with a mini flat
screwdriver (turning the buttons clockwise will reduce the attenuation
value, and turning the counterclockwise will increase the attenuation
value). Fine adjustment of the input optical power at the EVEN_I and
ODD_I ports are supported.
5.5.5 Fixed Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card
The fixed optical add / drop multiplexer cards include the SOAD4 and SOAD8 cards.
The main parameter to be commissioned for these cards is the insertion loss.
The insertion loss of SOAD series cards is calculated as per the formulas below:
u The insertion loss of the An (n≤8) interface→LO interface = the input optical
power at the An (n≤8) interface - the output optical power at the LO interface.
The deviation should be less than 4.0dB.
u The insertion loss of the MI interface→LO interface＝the input optical power at

the MI interface - the output optical power at the LO interface. The deviation
should be less than 4.0dB.
5-42 Version: B
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→Dn (n≤8) interface = the input optical
power at the LI interface - the output optical power at the Dn (n≤8) interface.
Caution:
The wavelength of the input single-wavelength optical signal at the LI

interface should be consistent with that of the optical signal at the
dropping interface to be tested.
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→MO interface＝the input optical power at

the LI interface - the output optical power at the MO interface. The deviation
Note:
u For An and Dn (n≤8) interfaces, the insertion loss test should be

conducted for each individual interface.
u For all tests on insertion loss, make sure that the optical fibers at the
optical interfaces not tested are disconnected.
5.5.6 Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card
The dynamic optical add / drop multiplexer cards include four cards: the WSS8M,
WSS8D, WSS4M and WSS4D cards. The main parameter to be commissioned for
these cards is the insertion loss.
WSSxD (x=4 or 8) Card
The insertion loss of WSSxD (x=4 or 8) card is calculated as per the formulas below:
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→Dn/MO (n≤8) interface = the input optical
power at the LI interface - the output optical power at the Dn/MO (n≤8) interface.
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→LO interface＝the input optical power at

the LI interface - the output optical power at the LO interface. The deviation
Version: B 5-43
Caution:
The test should be conducted when the optical fibers are connected with
the MI and MO interfaces of the card.
u The insertion loss of the MI / E1 interface→LO interface＝the input optical

power at the MI / E1 interface - the output optical power at the LO interface. The
deviation should be less than 6.5dB.
u The insertion loss of the ADD interface→LO interface＝the input optical power
at the ADD interface - the output optical power at the LO interface. The
deviation should be less than 3.5dB.
Note:
u For An and Dn (n≤8) interfaces, the insertion loss test should be

conducted for each individual interface.
WSSxM (x=4 or 8) Card
The insertion loss of WSSxM (x=4 or 8) card is calculated as per the formulas
below:
u The insertion loss of the An/MI (n≤8) interface→LO interface = the input optical
power at the An/MI (n≤8) interface - the output optical power at the LO interface.
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→LO interface＝the input optical power at

the LI interface - the output optical power at the LO interface. The deviation
Caution:
The test should be conducted when the optical fibers are connected with
the MI and MO interfaces of the card.
5-44 Version: B
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→DROP interface＝the input optical power

at the LI interface - the output optical power at the DROP interface. The
deviation should be no more than 3.5dB.
u The insertion loss of the LI interface→MO / EO interface＝the input optical

power at the LI interface - the output optical power at the MO / EO interface.
The deviation should be no more than 6.5dB.
Note:
u For An (n≤8) interfaces, the insertion loss test should be conducted

for each interface independently.
5.5.7 Optical Amplification Card
The main task of commissioning the optical amplifier card is to set the expected
value for the output optical power.
Input Optical Power
No commissioning is needed for the input optical power on the IN interface of the
optical amplifier card. Usually the signals from the multiplexer card (such as the
OMU, VMU and ITL50 card) access the IN interface of the OA card directly and the
signals from the MAIN-D interface of the OSCAD card access the IN interface of the
PA card directly.
Output Optical Power
u Commissioning requirements
4 For a fully populated system, the output power on the OUT interface of the
optical amplifier card must be its saturated output power.
Version: B 5-45
4 For a system not fully populated, the output optical power＝saturated
output power－10lg (N means the total number of the channels that

can be amplified by the amplification card, and n means the number of
channels that are amplified actually).
Note:
u Inspect performance values such as the input optical power (IOPM),

output optical power (OOPM) and electrical variable attenuation
value (VOA_TT). Calculate and validate the performance values as
per the formula below: the actual input power at the optical power -
the VOA_TT value = the IOPM value; IOPM value + gain of
amplification card = OOPM value.
u You can find the saturated output power value and the total number
of channels that can be amplified for each type of the optical
amplification card via the label on the module inside the card.
u For secondary amplification where the PA card, DCM card and OA

card are used, you need to guarantee the saturated output power of
the OA card.
u Commissioning procedures
1) Acquire the model number of the optical amplifier module: acquire the
model number of the card's optical module by reading the label on the
module in the card or by querying the card status via the network
management system. For instance, if the model number of an OA card is
481821, it indicates that the card can amplify up to 48 wavelengths, with
the gain of 18 dB and the saturated output power of 21 dBm.
2) Calculate the expected value of the output optical power: the output optical
power＝the saturated output power－10lg (N means the total number

of the channels that can be amplified by the amplification card, and n
means the number of channels that are actually amplified).
5-46 Version: B
3) Set the expected value of the output optical power: in the Special-Config
tab on the network management system, set the
Output_OP_Expect_Value item to the calculated expected output optical
power value.
4) Check the optical power reported by the network management system:

query the performance of the card via the network management system.
Compare the input and output optical power reported by the network
management system with the actual input and output optical power. Make
sure the deviation is within ±1dB.
5) Check the accuracy of the card gain: calculate the difference between the
reported output optical power and input optical power (i.e, the gain of the
card). Make sure the calculated gain is consistent with the gain indicated
by the model number of the optical amplifier module.
6) Check the relationship between the performance values such as IOPM,

OOPM and VOA_ATT. Make sure that the aforesaid formula is true for
them.
5.5.8 OSC / EOSC Card
Commissioning requirements for the OSC / EOSC card are described as follows:
u Make sure the fiber connection between the OSC / EOSC card and the
associated card is correct.
u Measure the transmitting optical power at the WTX interface or ETX interface of
the OSC / EOSC card.
4 For common module, the normal range of the value is between -7 dBm and
-2 dBm.
4 For the large span module, the value should be above 2 dBm.
u Measure the receiving optical power at the WRX or ERX interface of the OSC /
EOSC card.
4 For common module, the normal range of the value is between -45 dBm
and -3 dBm.
4 For the large span module module, the normal range of the value is
between -48 dBm and -8 dBm.
Version: B 5-47
Note:
If the input optical power exceeds the normal range, you can adjust it by
adding or removing the optical attenuator until it meets the requirement.
u You should add a proper optical attenuator for the interconnection of OSC /
EOSC cards in a station to avoid power overload on the WRX or ERX interface.
Caution:
When the test values mentioned above fail to meet requirements, you
should clean the fiber connectors. If the values still do not meet
requirements, hunt for and remove the fault with the OSC / EOSC card.
5.5.9 DCM
Commissioning requirements for DCM
u Test the DCM input signals with a spectrum analyzer and make sure the input
optical power of each wavelength is no more than -3 dBm.
u Test the input optical power and output optical power of DCM, the difference of
which is the insertion loss of the DCM. Make sure that the insertion loss is
within the specified range. See Common Commissioning Parameter for
relevant parameters.
5.6 Configuring Intelligent Fan
Configure the intelligent fans properly so that the equipment could operate normally
and the equipment noise could be reduced.
Prerequisites
The NE where the fan unit to be configured is located has been connected to the
network management system.
5-48 Version: B
Tool / Instrument
OTNM2000
Procedure
1. In the NE subrack view on the OTNM2000, right-click the EMVU card in the NE
where the intelligent fan unit to be configured is located, and select
CONFIGURATION from the shortcut menu that appears.
Note:
Similar to the EMVU card, to configure the EMU card, select
CONFIGURATION→Card-Special-Config tab.
2. Set the fan control mode: click the Board_Specific_Config tab, and set the
Fan_Control_Mode, as illustrated in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Setting the Fan Control Mode
Caution:
Manual control of fans may affect the normal operation of the equipment,
and the equipment noise will be extremely high. It is required that the
manual mode is used only for equipment commissioning, and should not
be used when the equipment is in operation.
3. Set the fan control delay value: click the Board_Specific_Config tab, and set
the Smart_Fan_Delaying, as illustrated in Figure 5-18.
Version: B 5-49
Figure 5-18 Setting the Delay Value of the Fan Control
Caution:
It is recommended to set the delay value to 5. If the delay value is set too
small, the rotation speed of the fans will be unstable, which will shorten
the working life of the fans. If the delay value is set too big, the
adjustment of fan rotation speed will be delayed, and the equipment
noise will become rather high.
4. Complete the intelligent fan configuration: When the configuration is completed,

click the Write->Device button on the left side of the card configuration window,
and then click OK in the dialog box that appears.
5. Confirm the intelligent fan configuration: In the NE subrack view on the

OTNM2000, right-click the EMVU card in the NE where the intelligent fan unit to
be confirmed is located, and select PERFORMANCE in the shortcut menu that
appears.
4 Check whether the Fan_Control_Mode is displayed as

Fan_Smart_Control. If not, please check whether the configuration is
correct and whether the configuration data have been written to the device.
4 Check whether the Smart_Fan_Shift is displayed as a normal value:

when the equipment runs at normal temperature (the ambient temperature
is lower than 30℃), the Smart_Fan_Shift of the fan unit should be
displayed as Low_Speed. If the item is displayed as another rotation
speed, please check whether the configuration of this item is correct and
whether the configuration data have been written to the equipment.
5-50 Version: B
Note:
If the configuration is correct but the rotation speed of the fan is
abnormal, check whether the equipment room environment meets the
requirements for equipment operation and whether the anti-dust screen
has been blocked. Refer to Daily Operation Guide for the method to clean
the anti-dust screen.
6. Check the fan alarm: if any fan alarm exists, check the operation status of the
fans. If a fan stops running or slows down in running visibly, replace the fan in a
timely manner. Refer to Daily Operation Guide for the method to replace the
fan.
Note:
When an abnormal alarm occurs on the fan, the smart mode and the
manual mode both fail. And the fan will rotate at a full speed to guarantee
the normal heat dissipation.
5.7 Setting the Expected Value for the

Amplification Card
Set proper expected values for the amplification cards and reserve a certain
redundancy for the optical power of the system. By doing so, the normal services
will not be affected when the system optical power fluctuates within a certain range,
and the demand for system expansion in the future is fulfilled.
Prerequisites
The NE in which the amplification card to be set with an expected value is located
has been connected to the network management system.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000
Version: B 5-51
Procedure
1. In the NE subrack view on the OTNM2000, right-click the amplification card to

be configured, and select CONFIGURATION in the shortcut menu that
appears.
2. Click the Special_Config tab in the card configuration window, and set the
Output_OP_Expect_Integer_Value and
Output_OP_Expect_Decimal_Value, as illustrated in Figure 5-19.
Note:
The expected value of the output optical power＝the saturated output
power－10lg (N means the total number of the channels that can be

amplified by the amplification card, and n means the number of channels
that are actually amplified).
Figure 5-19 Setting the Expected Value of the Output Optical Power
3. Click the Write->Device button on the left side of the card configuration window,
4. In the NE subrack view, right-click the card, and select COMMAND from the
shortcut menu that appears.
5. Set the EVOA to TRACE in the control command GUI of the card, and click the
button on the right side of SET_EVOA. Then click OK in the dialog box that
appears, as illustrated in Figure 5-20.
5-52 Version: B
Figure 5-20 Setting the Optical Attenuator Control
6. In the control command GUI, set the EVOA to LOCK, and then click the
button on the right side of SET_EOVA. Then click OK in the dialog box that
appears to complete the configuration of the expected value for the
amplification card.
Note:
u When you adjust the input and output optical power of the
amplification card, you should assign engineers to the previous and
succeeding stations. These engineers will cooperate you in optical
power adjustment and monitor the change in the optical power of the
amplification card with an optical power meter in a real-time manner.
u The network management system should monitor the change in the

optical power of the OTU card in a real-time manner. It is
recommended that you make the adjustment at each network
section one by one, first tracing and then locking. In this way, you are
able to keep the receiving optical power of the OTU card in the
normal range.
5.8 Example of Optical Power Commissioning at

A Single Station
A simple project example is given below to introduce the methods and procedures
for optical power commissioning at a single station.
Version: B 5-53
5.8.1 Project Information
Network Overview
The network and service allocation in a project is shown in Figure 5-21. The FONST
5000 is used at Stations A, B, C and D, and each station is configured as 96-
channel system. Station A and Station D are OTM stations; Station B is an OLA
station, and Station C is an OADM station. Station A is connected directly with the
network management system, and the other NEs are connected with the network
management system via DCC. Commission the three network sections in the
sequence A↔B, B↔C and C↔D. During the commissioning of each network
section, both ends of the network section should be equipped with project personnel
as well as operators of the network management system.
Figure 5-21 Project Information (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A Single Station)
Card Configuration
See Figure 5-22, Figure 5-23 and Figure 5-24 for card configuration at each station
in the project.
5-54 Version: B
Figure 5-22 Card Configuration at Station A and Station D (Optical Power Commissioning at A
Single Station)
Version: B 5-55
Figure 5-23 Card Configuration at Station B (Optical Power Commissioning at A Single

Station)
5-56 Version: B
Figure 5-24 Card Configuration at Station C (Optical Power Commissioning at A Single

Station)
Version: B 5-57
Note:
For the OADM station, the card configuration in the mode of FOADM
(OMU+ODU) is provide here only. For other modes of OADM, you can
configure the cards according to their optical fiber connection diagrams
respectively. See Adding the Card for the configuration method.
Card Parameters
See Table 5-4 for the optical power parameters of the optical interface cards at
each station in the project.
Table 5-4 Optical Power Parameters (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A Single
Station)
Tx Optical Power at Rx Optical Power at

Card Name Wavelength Wavelength
Client-Side (dBm) Client-Side (dBm)
Division Side (dBm) Division Side (dBm)
8TDGF -11.5 to -3 -19 to -3 －－

OTU2S -6 to -1 -11 to 0.5 -5 to -1 -14 to 0
2LMS2E －－ -5 to -1 -14 to 0
OSC －－ -7 to -2 -45 to -3
See Table 5-5 for the parameters of the optical amplification cards at each station in
the project.
Table 5-5 Parameters of the Optical Amplification Cards (for Commissioning the Optical Power
at A Single Station)
Number of Channels That Saturation Output Optical

Card Name Gain (dB)
Can be Amplified Power (dBm)
OA 48 18 21
PA 48 14 14
See Table 5-6 for the insertion loss parameters of the cards at each station in the
project.
5-58 Version: B
Table 5-6 Insertion Loss Index (for Commissioning the Optical Power at A Single Station)
Card Name Insertion Loss Index

The insertion loss is no more than 7dB when the VOA is 0dB. The
VMU48 (dB)
deviation for insertion loss is no more than 1.2dB.
The insertion loss is no more than 6.5dB. The deviation for insertion loss
ODU48 (dB)
is no more than 1.5dB.
OMU4 (dB)
ODU4 (dB)
Insertion loss: An/MI→LO＜4 ; LI→LO＜7.7; LI→DROP＜3.5; L
WSS8M (dB)
→MO/EO＜6.5
Insertion loss: LI→Dn/MO＜4; LI→LO＜7.7 ; MI/EI→LO＜6.5; ADD→LO
WSS8D (dB)
＜3.5
SOAD8 (dB) Insertion loss: An→LO＜4 ; MI→LO＜4 ; LI→Dn＜4; LI→MO＜4
ITL50（dB） <2
The insertion loss in the OSC is no more than 1.0dB; and the insertion
OSCAD (dB)
loss in the main optical path is no more than 0.6dB.
DCM (60km) (dB) ≤ 6.4

Pigtail (dB) ≤ 0.5
5.8.2 OTM Station
Pay attention to the following two aspects while connecting the pigtails at the OTM
stations:
u Commission the Rx and Tx optical power at each optical interface. Make sure
that the Rx and Tx optical power at each optical interface is within the best
range of values before connecting the optical fibers.
u Calculate the insertion loss for cards or pigtails with special requirements on
insertion loss. Make sure that the insertion loss of each card and pigtail is within
the normal range.
Prerequisites
u Users have completed the hardware inspection.
u The equipment has been powered on.
Version: B 5-59
u The IP address of the EMVU card has been written into the equipment
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, an optical power meter and attenuators of various models.
Procedures
The commissioning methods for Station A and Station D are the same. See
Figure 5-25 for the optical fiber connection diagrams at Station A. Below are the
procedures for commissioning:
Figure 5-25 Fiber Connection at OLM Station (Optical Power Commissioning at A Single
Station)
1. Deliver the management configuration data to Station A with reference to the

procedures provided in Delivering the Management Configuration, so that
Station A is connected to the network management system.
2. Set the expected values for the OA and PA cards with reference to Setting the
Expected Value for the Amplification Card. The expected output value for the
OA card = 21–10lg (48/4) = 10dBm; the expected output value for the PA card
= 14–10lg (48/4) = 3dBm.
5-60 Version: B
3. Acquire the Tx optical power of the OA card and PA card in the current
performance GUI on the network management system. Make sure that the Tx
optical power of the OA and PA cards accord with the set values.
4. Commission the optical client-side interfaces on the 8TDGF card and OTU2S
card.
1) Measure the Tx optical power at the client-side OUT interfaces on the

8TDGF card and OTU2S card with the optical power meter. Make sure that
the measured Tx optical power of the cards meet the requirements given in
Project Information.
2) Add an 5dB to 8dB attenuator at the client-side IN interface of the 8TDGF

card and OTU2S card respectively.
5. Commission the wavelength division side optical interfaces on the OTU2S card
and LMS2E card.
1) Measure the Tx optical power at the wavelength division side TX interfaces

on the OTU2S card and LMS2E card respectively with the optical power
meter. Make sure that the measured Tx optical power of the cards meet
the requirements given in Project Information.
2) Add an attenuator to adjust the Tx optical power of the OTU2S card and
LMS2E card to -2dBm, and connect the pigtails from the OTU2S card and
LMS2E card to the VMU48-O card.
Note:
Make sure that the surface of both ends of the pigtails are clean while
connecting them, and that the attenuation of the pigtails is no more than
0.5dB.
6. Calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card. Make sure that the single
channel insertion loss of the card is no more than 7dB. Connect the pigtails
from the VMU48-O card to the ITL50 card when the test result is normal. Refer
to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the
insertion loss of the VMO48-O card.
Version: B 5-61
Note:
u The insertion loss of the multiplexer and demultiplexer cards refer to

the single-channel insertion loss. To calculate the single-channel
insertion loss, you need remove all the optical fibers other than the
one to be measured.
u Besides the card insertion loss, the difference between each single
channel insertion loss values should also meet the card
specifications.
u The insertion loss index of the VMU card refer to the insertion loss
value tested when the VOA attenuation value is set to 0dB.
7. Calculate the insertion loss of the ITL50 card. The insertion loss of the card
should be less than 2dB. Refer to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards
for the methods to calculate the insertion loss of the ITL50 card.
8. Press down the CUT button on the OA card panel to shut down the laser, and
connect the pigtails from the ITL50 card to the OA card.
9. Connect the pigtails from the OA card to the OSCAD card. Press the CUT
button on the OA card panel so that the button is released to turn on the card
laser.
10. Calculate the insertion loss of the main optical path of the OSCAD card, which
should be no more than 0.6dB. If the result of the insertion loss test is normal,
connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card to the ODF. Refer to Optical
Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the insertion
loss of the OSCAD card.
11. Measure the Tx optical power of the OSC card, making sure that the
measured value meets the standard given in Project Information. Then connect
the pigtail from the OSC card to the OSCAD card.
12. Calculate the OSC insertion loss of the OSCAD card, which should be no
more than 1.0dB. Refer to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the
methods to calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card.
5-62 Version: B
13. Connect the optical power meter to the ODF, and test the Rx optical power of
the line. If the result of the test is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF to
the OSCAD card.
14. Calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card with reference to Step 10.
15. Commission the Rx optical power of the OSC card, making sure that it is in the
range from the sensitivity value + 3dB to the overload value - 5dB, i. e. from
-11dB to -5dB. Then connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card to the OSC card.
16. Press down the CUT button on the PA card panel to shut down the laser, and
connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card to the PA card.
17. Connect the pigtails from the OA card to the OSCAD card. Press the CUT
button on the OA card panel so that the button is released to turn on the card
laser.
18. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card with reference to Step 7. If the
insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card to the ODU48-O
card.
19. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card, the single-channel insertion
loss of which should be no more than 6.5dB. Refer to Optical Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Cards for the method to calculate the insertion loss of the
ODU48-O card.
20. Commission the Rx optical power of the wavelength division side optical
interfaces of the OTU2S card and LMS2E card, making sure that the Rx optical
power values are within the range from the sensitivity value + 3dB to the
overload value - 5dB, i.e. from -42dBm to -8dBm. Then connect the pigtails
from the ODU48-O card to the wavelength division side optical interfaces of the
OTU2S card and LMS2E card.
21. Commissioning the CE band section: commissioning of the CE band section

is similar to that of the CO band section. Follow Step 3 to Step 19 to implement
the CE band section commissioning.
Succeeding Operations
u After commissioning, record the Tx optical power, Rx optical power, insertion

loss and use of attenuators for all cards in the commissioning record, which will
serve as the reference for system commissioning and maintenance in later
stage.
Version: B 5-63
u Prepare the labels for each section of pigtail as specified to facilitate

maintenance in the future.
5.8.3 OLA Station
Pay attention to the following two aspects while connecting the OLA station:
u Commission the optical power at each optical interface. Make sure that the
optical power at each optical interface is within the best range of values before
connecting the optical fibers.
the normal range.
Prerequisites
u The IP address of the EMU card has been written into the equipment correctly.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, an optical power meter, a spectrum analyzer and attenuators of

various models.
Procedures
See Figure 5-26 for the optical fiber connection diagrams at Station B. Below are the
5-64 Version: B
Figure 5-26 Fiber Connection at OLA Station (Optical Power Commissioning at A Single
Station)
1. Test the Rx optical power on the line between the ODF and Station A: connect
the optical power meter to the ODF, and test the Rx optical power from Station
A. When the test result is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF to the
OSCAD card.
2. Calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card at Station A. It is required that
the main optical path insertion loss should be no more than 0.6dB, and the
OSC insertion loss should be no more than 1.0dB. Refer to Optical Multiplexer
and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the insertion loss of the
OSCAD card.
3. Commission the Rx optical power of the OSC card from Station A, making sure
that it is in the range from the sensitivity value + 3dB to the overload value -
5dB, i.e. from -11dB to -5dB. Then connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at
Station A to the OSC card.
4. Test the Tx optical power from the OSC card to Station A, making sure that the
Tx optical power meet the standard given in Project Information. Then connect
the pigtail from the OSC card to the OSCAD card at Station A.
5. Connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at Station A to the ODF. The
attenuation of the pigtail should be no more than 0.5dB.
6. Check the DCC with reference to Checking DCC Indicator LED, until the
network management system could ping Station B.
Version: B 5-65

Station B is connected to the network management system.
8. Set the expected output optical power values for the OA and PA cards at
Station B. The expected output value for the OA card = 21– 10lg (48/4) =
10dBm; the expected output value for the PA card = 14–10lg (48/4) = 3dBm.
Refer to Setting the Expected Value for the Amplification Card for the method to
configure the expected output optical power of the OA and PA cards.
9. Acquire the Tx optical power of the OA card and PA card in the performance
GUI on the network management system. Make sure that the Tx optical power
of the OA and PA cards accord with the set values.
10. Shut down the laser on the PA card at Station A: press down the CUT button
on the panel of the PA card at Station A to shut down the card laser. Then
connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at Station A to the PA card.
11. Turn on the laser on the PA card at Station A: Connect the pigtail from the PA
card to the DCM at Station A. When the connection is normal, press the CUT
button on the PA card panel so that the button is released to turn on the card
laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM at Station A, making sure that the
actual insertion loss is no more than 6.4dB. Refer to DCM for the method to
calculate the insertion loss of the DCM.
13. Shut down the laser on the OA card at Station C: press down the CUT button
on the panel of the OA card to shut down the card laser. Then connect the
pigtail from the DCM at Station A to the OA card.
14. Turn on the laser on the OA card at Station C (Tx): Connect the pigtail from
the OA card to the OSCAD card at Station C (Tx). When the connection is
normal, press the CUT button on the OA card panel so that the button is
released to turn on the card laser.
15. Follow Step 2 to calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card at Station C. If
the insertion loss value is normal, connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card to
the ODF at Station C.
16. Follow Step 1 to Step 15 to commission optical power in the Station C Rx and
Station A Tx direction.
5-66 Version: B

stage.

5.8.4 OADM Station
The OADM station has seven composition modes; the paragraphs below will
introduce the commissioning method for each mode respectively.
5.8.4.1 FOADM Station (ODU + OMU)
Pay attention to the following two aspects while connecting the pigtails at the
FOADM stations:
u Commission the Rx and Tx optical power at each optical interface. Make sure
that the Rx and Tx optical power at each optical interface is within the best
range of values before connecting the optical fibers.
the normal range.
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Version: B 5-67
Procedures
See Figure 5-27 for the optical fiber connection at Station C. Below are the
Figure 5-27 Fiber Connection at OADM Station (Optical Power Commissioning at A Single
Station Using the ODU+OMU Mode)
1. Test the Rx optical power on the line between the ODF and Station B: connect
the optical power meter to the ODF, and test the Rx optical power from Station
B. When the test result is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF to the
OSCAD card.
2. Calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card at Station B. It is required that
the main optical path insertion loss should be no more than 0.6dB, and the
5-68 Version: B
OSC insertion loss should be no more than 1.0dB. Refer to Optical Multiplexer
and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the insertion loss of the
OSCAD card.
3. Commission the Rx optical power of the OSC card from Station B, making sure
that it is in the range between the sensitivity value + 3dB and the overload
value - 5dB, i. e. between -42dB and -8dB. Then connect the pigtail from the
OSCAD card at Station B to the OSC card.
4. Test the Tx optical power from the OSC card with the optical power meter,
making sure that the Tx optical power meet the standard given in Project
Information. Then connect the pigtail from the OSC card to the OSCAD card at
Station B.
5. Connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at Station B to the ODF.
network management system could ping Station C.

Station C is connected to the network management system.
8. Set the expected output optical power values for the OA and PA cards at
Station C. The expected output value for the OA card = 21– 10lg (48/4) =
10dBm; the expected output value for the PA card = 14–10lg (48/4) = 3dBm.
Refer to Setting the Expected Value for the Amplification Card for the method to
configure the expected output optical power of the OA and PA cards.
10. Shut down the laser on the PA card at Station B: press down the CUT button
on the panel of the PA card at Station B to shut down the card laser. Then
connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at Station B to the PA card.
11. Turn on the laser on the PA card at Station B (Rx): Connect the pigtail from the
PA card to the ITL50 card at Station B (Rx). When the connection is normal,
press the CUT button on the PA card panel so that the button is released to turn
on the card laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the ITL50 card at Station B, making sure the the
card insertion loss is less than 2dB. When the test result is normal, connect the
Version: B 5-69
pigtail from the ITL50 card to the ODU48-O card at Station B. Refer to Optical
Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the insertion
loss of the ITL50 card.
13. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card at Station B (Rx), and
complete the fiber connection.
1) Refer to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the method to

calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card. It is required that the
single-channel insertion loss of the card should be no more than 6.5dB.
2) Connect the pigtail from the ODU48-O card to the RX interface on the
wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at
Station B. Make sure that the Rx optical power at the wavelength division
side optical interface of the OTU2S card is within the range between the
sensitivity value + 3dB and the overload value - 5dB, i.e. between -11dBm
and -5dBm.
14. Commission the Tx optical power at the wavelength division side optical
interfaces of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at Station D, and
1) Measure the Tx optical power at the wavelength division side TX interface

on the OTU2S card with the optical power meter. Make sure that the
measured Tx optical power of the card meet the requirements given in
Project Information.
2) Add an attenuator to adjust the Tx optical power of the OTU2S card to

-2dBm, and connect the pigtail from the OTU2S card to the VMU48-O card
at Station D.
15. Connect the pigtail from the ODU48-O card at Station B (Rx) to the VMU48-O
card at Station D (Tx).
16. Calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card at Station D (Tx). Make sure
that the single-channel insertion loss of the card is no more than 7dB. Then
connect the pigtail from the VMU48-O card to the ITL50 card at Station D (Tx).
Refer to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to
calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card.
17. Follow Step 12 to calculate the insertion loss of the ITL50 card at Station D
(Tx).
5-70 Version: B
18. Shut down the laser on the OA card at Station D (Tx): press down the CUT
button on the panel of the OA card at Station D (Tx) to shut down the card laser.
Then connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card at Station D (Tx) to the OA card.
19. Turn on the laser on the OA card at Station D (Tx): Connect the pigtail from
the OA card to the OSCAD card at Station D (Tx). When the connection is
20. Follow Step 2 to calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card at Station D
(Tx). If the insertion loss value is normal, connect the pigtail from the OSCAD
card to the ODF at Station D (Tx).
21. Test the Rx optical power of the ODF line at Station D (Rx): connect the optical
power meter to the ODF, and test the line Rx optical power at Station D (Rx).
When the test result is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF to the OSCAD
card.
22. Commission the Rx optical power of the OSC card from Station D with
reference to Step 3. Then connect the pigtail from the OSC card to the OSCAD
23. Commission the Tx optical power of the OSC card to Station D with reference
to Step 4. Then connect the pigtail from the OSC card to the OSCAD card at
Station D (Rx).
24. Calculate the insertion loss of the OSCAD card at Station D (Rx) with
reference to Step 2.
25. Shut down the laser on the PA card at Station D: press down the CUT button
on the panel of the PA card at Station D to shut down the card laser. Then
connect the pigtail from the OSCAD card at Station D to the PA card.
26. Turn on the laser on the PA card at Station D (Rx): Connect the pigtail from
the PA card to the ITL50 card at Station D (Rx). When the connection is normal,
on the card laser.
27. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station D (Rx) with reference
to Step 12. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ITL50
card to the ODU48-O card at Station D (Rx).
28. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card at Station D (Rx) with
reference to Step 13. When the insertion loss value is normal, connect the
Version: B 5-71
pigtail from the ODU48-O card to the optical interface on the wavelength
division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at Station D (Rx). Make
sure that the Rx optical power of the wavelength division side optical interface
on the OTU2S card is within the range between the sensitivity value + 3dB and
the overload value - 5dB, i.e. between -11dBm and -5dBm.
29. Commission the wavelength division side optical interfaces of the OTU2S
card in the CO band section at Station B (Tx), and complete the fiber
connection.
1) Measure the Tx optical power on the wavelength division side of the

OTU2S card with the optical power meter. Make sure that the measured Tx
optical power of the card meet the requirements given in Project
Information.
2) Add an attenuator to adjust the Tx optical power of the OTU2S card to

-2dBm, and connect the pigtail from the OTU2S card to the VMU48-O card
at Station B (Tx).
30. Connect the pigtail from the ODU48-O card at Station D (Rx) to the VMU48-O
card at Station B (Tx).
31. Calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card at Station B (Tx) with
reference to Step 16. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the
VMU48-O card to the ITL50 card at Station B (Tx).
32. Follow Step 12 to calculate the insertion loss of the ITL50 card at Station D
(Tx).
33. Shut down the laser on the OA card at Station B: press down the CUT button
on the panel of the OA card to shut down the card laser. Then connect the
pigtail from the ITL50 card at Station B (Tx) to the OA card.
34. Turn on the laser on the OA card at Station B (Tx): Connect the pigtail from
the OA card to the OSCAD card at Station B (Tx). When the connection is
ejected to turn on the card laser.
35. Commission the CE band section with reference to Step 13 to Step 31.
36. Commission all the client-side optical interfaces on the OTU2S cards at the
station.
1) Measure the Tx optical power at the OUT interface on the client side of the
5-72 Version: B

Information.
2) Add a 5dB to 8dB attenuator at the client-side IN interfaces of each card

respectively.

stage.

5.8.4.2 FOADM Station (SOAD8)
Pay attention to the following two aspects before connecting the optical fibers inside
the cabinet and the pigtails from the equipment to the ODF:
the normal range.
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Version: B 5-73
Procedures
Station Using the SOAD8 Mode)
1. Refer to Step 1 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU) to test the Rx optical power of
the ODF from Station B.
2. Refer to Step 2 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU) to calculate the insertion loss
of the OSCAD card at Station B (Rx).
3. Refer to Step 3 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU) to commission the Rx optical

power of the OSC card from Station B.
4. Refer to Step 3 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU) to commission the Tx optical


8. Configure the expected output optical power of the OA and PA cards at Station
C: refer to Step 8 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
5-74 Version: B
PA card to the SOAD8 card at Station B (Rx). When the connection is normal,
on the card laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the SOAD8 card at Station B (Rx), which should
meet the requirement in Project Information. Then connect the pigtail from the
SOAD8 card at Station B (Rx) to the SOAD8 card at Station D (Tx). Refer to
Fixed Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card for the methods to calculate the
insertion loss of the SOAD8 card.
13. Connect the pigtails from the SOAD8 card at Station B (Rx) to the RX
interfaces on the wavelength division side of the two OTU2S cards at Station B
(Rx). Make sure that the Rx optical power of the wavelength division side
optical interfaces of the OTU2S cards is within the range between the
sensitivity value + 3dB and the overload value - 5dB, i.e. between -11dBm and
-5dBm.
14. Commission and connect the pigtails from the SOAD8 card at Station B (Rx)
to the TX interface on the wavelength division side of the two OTU2S cards at
Station B (Rx) with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
15. Follow Step 12 to calculate the insertion loss of the SOAD8 card at Station D
(Tx).
16. Connect the pigtails from the SOAD8 card at Station D (Tx) to the RX
interfaces on the wavelength division side of the two OTU2S cards at Station D
(Tx) with reference to Step 13.
17. Connect the pigtails from the SOAD8 card at Station D (Tx) to the TX
Version: B 5-75
Then connect the pigtail from the SOAD8 card at Station D (Tx) to the OA card.
21. Test the Rx optical power on the line between the ODF and Station D (Rx):
connect the optical power meter to the ODF, and test the Rx optical power from
Station D (Rx). When the test result is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF
to the OSCAD card.
Station D (Rx).
the PA card to the SOAD8 card at Station D (Rx). When the connection is
normal, press the CUT button on the PA card panel so that the button is
27. Calculate the insertion loss of the SOAD8 card at Station D (Rx) with
SOAD8 card at Station D (Rx) to the SOAD8 card at Station B (Tx).
5-76 Version: B
28. Shut down the laser on the OA card at Station B (Tx): press down the CUT
button on the panel of the OA card at Station B (Tx) to shut down the card laser.
Then connect the pigtail from the SOAD8 card at Station B (Tx) to the OA card.
station.
Information.

respectively.

stage.

5.8.4.3 ROADM Station (WSS8M)
the cabinet and the optical fibers from the equipment to the ODF:
the normal range.
Version: B 5-77
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Procedures
Station Using the WSS8M Mode)

5-78 Version: B


PA card to the WSS8M card at Station B (Rx). When the connection is normal,
on the card laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station B (Rx), which
should meet the requirement in Project Information. Then connect the pigtail
from the WSS8M card at Station B (Rx) to the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx).
Refer to Dynamic Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer Card for the methods to
calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card.
13. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station B to the ITL50 cards at
Station B.
14. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station B with reference to
Step 12 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU). If the insertion loss is normal,
connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card to the ODU48-O card at Station B.
15. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card at Station, and complete the
fiber connection.
Version: B 5-79
1) Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card with reference to Step 13
in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
and -5dBm.
16. Commission and connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station B to the
TX interface on the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band
section at Station B with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
17. Follow Step 12 to calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station D.
18. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station D to the ITL50 cards at
Station D.
19. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station D with reference to
Step 14. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card
to the ODU48-O card at Station D.
20. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48–O card at Station D with reference
to Step 15, and connect the pigtail from the ODU48–O card to the RX interface
on the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at
Station D.
21. Commission and connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station D to the
TX interface on the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band
at Station D with reference to Step 16.
Then connect the pigtail from the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx) to the OA card.
5-80 Version: B
25. Connect the optical power meter to the ODF, and test the Rx optical power of
the ODF at Station D. If the result of the test is normal, connect the pigtail from
the ODF to the OSCAD card.
Station D (Rx).
the PA card to the WSS8M card at Station D (Rx). When the connection is
normal, press the CUT button on the PA card panel so that the button is
31. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station D (Rx) with
WSS8M card at Station D (Rx) to the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx).
Then connect the pigtail from the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx) to the OA card.
station.
Version: B 5-81

Information.

respectively.

stage.

5.8.4.4 ROADM Station (WSS8D)
the normal range.
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
5-82 Version: B
Procedures
Figure 5-30 Fiber Connection at OADM Station (Optical Power Commissioning at a single
Station Using the WSS8D Mode)



Version: B 5-83
on the card laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx), which
from the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx) to the WSS8D card at Station D (Tx).
calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8D card.
13. Connect the pigtail from the WSS8D card at the Station B to the RX interface
on the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at
Station B. Make sure that the Rx optical power at the wavelength division side
optical interface of the OTU2S card is within the range between the sensitivity
value + 3dB and the overload value - 5dB, i.e. between -11dBm and -5dBm.
14. Commission and connect the pigtails from the TX interface on the wavelength
division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band section at Station B to the
VMU48_O card at Station B with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU
+ OMU).
15. Calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card at Station B. Make sure that
the single-channel insertion loss of the card is no more than 7dB. Then connect
the pigtail from the VMU48-O card to the ITL50 card at Station B. Refer to
Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to calculate the
insertion loss of the VMU48-O card.
16. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station B with reference to
Step 12 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU). If the insertion loss is normal,
connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card to the WSS8D card at Station B.
5-84 Version: B
17. Follow Step 12 to calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8D card at Station D.
18. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8D card at Station D to the RX interface on
the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the CO band at Station D
with reference to Step 13.
19. Connect the pigtails from the TX interface on the wavelength division side of
the OTU2S card in the CO band at Station D to the VMU48_O card at Station D
with reference to Step 14.
20. Calculate the insertion loss of the VMU48-O card at Station D with reference
to Step 15, and connect the pigtail from the VMU48-O card to the ITL50 card at
Station D.
21. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station D with reference to
Step 16. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card
to the WSS8D card at Station D.
Then connect the pigtail from the WSS8D card at Station D (Tx) to the OA card.
25. Connect the optical power meter to the optical interface on the ODF that
receiving optical signals from Station D, and test the Rx optical power on the
line. If the result of the test is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODF to the
OSCAD card.
Station D (Rx).
Version: B 5-85
the PA card to the WSS8D card at Station D (Rx). When the connection is
normal, press the CUT button on the PA card panel so that the button is ejected
to turn on the card laser.
31. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8D card at Station D (Rx) with
WSS8D card at Station D (Rx) to the WSS8D card at Station B (Tx).
Then connect the pigtail from the WSS8D card at Station B (Tx) to the OA card.
station.
Information.

respectively.

stage.
5-86 Version: B

5.8.4.5 ROADM Station (WSS8D+OMU)
the normal range.
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Procedures
Version: B 5-87
Station Using the Wss8d+Omu Mode)



5-88 Version: B
on the card laser.
from the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx) to the OMU4 card at Station D (Tx).
13. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx) to the RX
-5dBm.
14. Calculate the insertion loss of the OMU4 card at Station D (Tx), making sure
that the insertion loss meet the requirements in Project Information. Refer to
insertion loss of the OMU4 card.
15. Commission and connect the pigtails from the OMU4 card at Station D (Tx) to
the TX interface on the wavelength division side of the two OTU2S cards at
Station D (Tx) with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
Then connect the pigtail from the OMU4 card at Station D (Tx) to the OA card.
Version: B 5-89
receives optical signals from Station D, and test the Rx optical power on the
OSCAD card.
Station D (Rx).
WSS8D card at Station D (Rx) to the OMU4 card at Station B (Tx).
26. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8D card at Station D (Rx) to the RX
(Rx) with reference to Step 13.
27. Calculate the insertion loss of the OMU4 card at Station B (Tx) with reference
to Step 14.
28. Connect the pigtails from the OMU4 card at Station B (Tx) to the TX interfaces
on the wavelength division side of the two OTU2S cards at Station B (Tx) with
5-90 Version: B
Then connect the pigtail from the OMU4 card at Station B (Tx) to the OA card.
station.
Information.

respectively.

stage.

5.8.4.6 ROADM Station (WSS8M+ODU)
the normal range.
Version: B 5-91
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Procedures
Station Using the WSS8M+ODU Mode)
5-92 Version: B



PA card to the ODU4 card at Station B (Rx). When the connection is normal,
on the card laser.
12. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU4 card at Station B (Rx), which should
meet the requirement in Project Information. Then connect the pigtail from the
ODU4 card at Station B (Rx) to the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx). Refer to
insertion loss of the ODU4 card.
13. Connect the pigtail from the ODU4 card at Station B (Rx) to the ITL50 card at
Station B (Rx).
14. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station B (Rx) with reference
to Step 12 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU). If the insertion loss is normal,
connect the pigtail from the ITL50 card to the ODU48-O card at Station B (Rx).
Version: B 5-93
15. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card at Station B (Rx), and
1) Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card with reference to Step 13
in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
and -5dBm.
16. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx), making sure
that the insertion loss should meet the requirements in Project Information.
17. Commission and connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx)
to the TX interface on the wavelength division side of the OTU2S card in the
CO band at Station D (Rx) with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU +
OMU).
OSCAD card.
5-94 Version: B
Station D (Rx).
the PA card to the ODU4 card at Station D (Rx). When the connection is normal,
on the card laser.
27. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU4 card at Station D (Rx) with reference
to Step 12. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ODU4
card at Station D (Rx) to the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx).
28. Connect the pigtail from the ODU4 card at Station D (Rx) to the ITL50 card at
Station D (Rx).
29. Calculate the insertion loss of the ILTL50 card at Station D (Rx) with reference
to Step 14. If the insertion loss is normal, connect the pigtail from the ITL50
card to the ODU48-O card at Station D (Rx).
30. Calculate the insertion loss of the ODU48-O card at Station D (Rx) with
reference to Step 15. When the insertion loss value is normal, connect the
pigtail from the ODU48-O card to the RX interface on the wavelength division
side of the OTU2S card in the CO band at Station D (Rx). Make sure that the
Rx optical power of the wavelength division side optical interface on the OTU2S
card is within the range between the sensitivity value + 3dB and the overload
value - 5dB, i.e. between -11dBm and -5dBm.
31. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx) with
Version: B 5-95
32. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx) to the TX
interface on the wavelength division side of theOTU2S card in the CO band
section at Station B (Tx) with reference to Step 17.
station.
Information.

respectively.

stage.

5.8.4.7 ROADM Station (WSS8D+WSS8M)
5-96 Version: B
the normal range.
Prerequisites
correctly.
Tool / Instrument
Procedures
Station Using the WSS8M+WSS8D Mode)
Version: B 5-97



on the card laser.
from the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx) to the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx).
13. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8D card at Station B (Rx) to the RX
5-98 Version: B
-5dBm.
14. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx), making sure
that the insertion loss should meet the requirements in Project Information.
Refer to Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Cards for the methods to
15. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station D (Tx) to the TX
(Tx) with reference to Step 14 in FOADM Station (ODU + OMU).
OSCAD card.
Station D (Rx).
Version: B 5-99
WSS8M card at Station D (Rx) to the WSS8D card at Station B (Tx).
26. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8D card at Station D (Rx) to the RX
(Rx) with reference to Step 13.
27. Calculate the insertion loss of the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx) with
28. Connect the pigtails from the WSS8M card at Station B (Tx) to the TX
station.
Information.

respectively.
5-100 Version: B

stage.

Version: B 5-101
6 System Commissioning
The following introduces the commissioning items, methods and procedures for the
FONST 5000 in the entire network.
General Rules for Commissioning
System Commissioning Flow
Testing the DCC
Enabling the Performance Collection Function
Adjusting the Flatness of Channel Optical Power
Setting Optical Power Threshold Values
Setting Dispersion Compensation for the N×40Gbit/s System
Commissioning Example for the N×10Gbit/s System
Version: B 6-1
6.1 General Rules for Commissioning
The FONST 5000's system commissioning requirements is closely related to the

bandwidth of the single-channel service. The commissioning requirements for the
N×40Gbit/s system are more detailed than those for the N×10Gbit/s and lower rate
systems.
Figure 6-1 Reference Points of the WDM System
Figure 6-1 defines the position of each reference points in the system, i.e. S, MPI-
SM, RM, SM, MPI-RM, R and Sn, Rn. Among them, S and R are the reference points
for the interfaces of the WDM system and the client system; MPI-SM, RM, SM and
MPI-RM are the reference points for the main optical path of the WDM system; Sn
and Rn are the reference points between the OTU and the OMU and between the
OTU and the ODU receptively in the N×40Gbit/s WDM system.
6-2 Version: B
Below are the definitions of each reference point:
u S: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the signal output interface
on the client-side equipment.
u Sn: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the output interface of the
OTU card to the optical multiplexer card.
u MPI-SM: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the output interface of
the multiplexer / amplification card.
u RM: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the input interface of the
line amplification card.
u SM: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the output interface of the
line amplification card.
u MPI-SM: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the output interface of
the multiplexer / amplification card.
u Rn: the reference point for optical fiber connection from the optical
demultiplexer card to the input interface of the OTU card.
u R: the reference point for optical fiber connection at the signal input interface on
the client-side equipment.
Commissioning Rules for the N×10Gbit/s System
Commissioning of the N×10Gbit/s system should follow the rules below:
u Keep the input optical power at each optical interface within the range between
the overload point value and the sensitivity value before connecting the
corresponding optical fibers.
u Add a proper attenuator at the client-side optical interface before the client
signal is accessed to the tributary card or the optical transponder card, so as to
prevent the optical module from being damaged by overhigh power of the client
signal.
u Commission and make sure that the wavelength division side output optical
power of the OTU card and the output optical power of the line card are -2dBm.
u The attenuation of optical cable line should meet the requirements of design,
and the difference between the attenuation values of the optical cable line in
the Rx and Tx directions should be less than 3dB.
Version: B 6-3
u Reserve a certain margin for optical power in commissioning, so that the

normal service of the system will not be affected when the optical power
fluctuates within a certain range.
u Make sure that the the configuration of the tabs in the card configuration GUI of
each card, such as the Input-OP-Low-Threshold, Input-OP-High-Threshold
and Output-OS-LOS-Threshold tabs meet the requirements for configuration.
Refer to Setting Optical Power Threshold Values for configuration operations
for each card.
u Requirements for dispersion compensation: implement dispersion

compensation as specified in early-stage planning. It is recommended that you
use the 1km DCM to compensate the dispersion on the 1km line.
u Flatness requirements: the flatness at the MPI-R point should be no more than
5dB and that at the MPI-S point should be no more than 3dB at each station.
u Requirements for OSNR (Optical Signal Noise Ratio): it is required that the
OSNR at the MPI-R point should be no less than 18dB and that at the MPI-S
point should be no less than 35dB at each station.
signal.
u Commission and make sure that the wavelength division side output optical
power of the OTU card and the output optical power of the line card are -1dBm.

6-4 Version: B
u Make sure that the the configuration of the tabs in the card configuration GUI of
for each card.
u Requirements for dispersion compensation: implement dispersion

compensation as specified in early-stage planning. It is recommended that you
use the 1km DCM to compensate the dispersion on the 1km line.
u It is recommended to enable the TDCM self-adaptive dispersion compensation

mode of the OTU card.
u Flatness requirements: the flatness at the MPI-R point should be no more than
5dB and that at the MPI-S point should be no more than 4dB at each station.
u OSNR requirements: the OSNR at the MPI-P point should be no less than
18dB at each station.
signal.

Version: B 6-5
u Make sure that the the configuration of the tabs in the Configuration GUI of
for each card.
u Flatness requirements: the flatness at the MPI-R point and the RM point should
be no more than 4dB and that at the MPI-S point and the SM point should be no
more than 4dB at each station.
u Requirements for OSNR: the OSNR at the MPI-R point at each station should
be no less than 18dB.
Note:
u In the N×100Gbit/s system (coherent reception; the modulation code

is PM-DQPSK), if the transmission rates of the channels are all
100Gbit/s, the dispersion and PMD will no longer limit the system
transmission distance, and the system does not need to be
configured with the DCM module.
u During the hybrid transmission of the 100Gbit/s system and the

40Gbit/s system (coherent reception; the modulation code is DPSK
or RZ-DQPSK), you should configure the dispersion compensation
according to the dispersion management principles of the 40G
system.
6.2 System Commissioning Flow
Figure 6-2 shows the system commissioning flow.
6-6 Version: B
Figure 6-2 System Commissioning Flow Chart
6.3 Testing the DCC
DCC (Data Communication Channel) refer to the channel between NEs to transfer
monitoring information. DCC is tested to confirm whether the network management
system can supervise and manage all the equipment in the network.
Version: B 6-7
Tool / Instrument
OTNM2000
Prerequisites
The NE to be tested can be successfully Pinged.
Procedures
1. Click the Start→Run in the taskbar of the WINDOWS.
2. Input cmd in the Run dialog box that appears and click OK.
3. In the "cmd" command DOS window that appears, enter telnet IP address of
the tested NE. Press "Enter" to execute the telnet command. For example, if
the IP address of the tested NE is 10.18.1.1, the command is telnet 10.18.1.1.
4. After that, enter sh ip os n in the DOS window, and click the Enter key to
execute the command.
5. Check whether the IP addresses of all adjacent NEs are displayed after
execution of the command.
Note:
The adjacent NE is an NE that is directly connected to this NE by optical
fiber.
4 The adjacent NE IP appears: indicates that the DCC between the tested
NE and the other adjacent NEs is normal.
4 No: The DCCs between the NE to be tested and some adjacent NEs
(whose IP addresses are not included in the returned results) have faults.
6.4 Enabling the Performance Collection

Function
Users can query the performance history as long as they have enabled the
performance collection function. The performance collection is suggested to be set
at the initial stage of equipment start-up and expansion and should be maintained
regularly.
6-8 Version: B
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000
Prerequisites
u The OTNM2000 can normally manage, configure and monitor the entire
network; that is, it can ping each NE successfully.
u The operator has the network management user right of an advanced user or
intermediate user.
Procedures
1. Double-click the icon on the desktop to access the OTNM2000 Login

Info dialog box and enter user name and password (both are 1 by default) in it.
Select the database server address to log into and click OK. You will access
the OTNM2000 window after a successful login.
2. Click Performance→PM Gather Setting in the toolbar to bring up the PM

TASK tab, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Enabling the Performance Gathering
Version: B 6-9
3. Select the NE to be enabled with performance collection function from the

Operational Tree pane. Click the Add button in the PM TASK tab and the
performance items of the selected NE will be shown in the tab.
Note:
To enable the performance collection function for all NEs, you need not
select the NEs one by one in the Operational Tee pane, but merely click
Add-All in the PM TASK tab.
4. Select the 15_minute and the 24_hour check boxes in the PM TASK tab.
5. Double-click the Begin time and the End time in the PM TASK tab, and then
enter the desired starting time and ending time.
6. Set the performance collection function for each NE with reference to Step 4
and Step 5, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Performance Collection Configuration Result
7. Click the Save button and click OK in the dialog box that appears to complete
the setting of performance collection.
6-10 Version: B
6.5 Adjusting the Flatness of Channel Optical

Power
In the DWDM system, due to the inherent gain variation of the amplification card
and the nonlinear effect of optical fibers, the difference in optical power between
each wavelength channel increases after the transmission of optical signals for a
certain distance. As a result, the channels' performance in receiving is degraded. In
this case, you need to adjust the flatness of the channel optical power, so as to
guarantee the normal operation of the system and the normal transmission of
services.
6.5.1 Operation Flow
Perform the spectrum test at the transmitting end (the MPI-S reference point) of the
previous station and the receiving end (the MPI-R reference point) of the
succeeding station respectively to test the flatness the channel optical power. For a
channel with variable optical power, make proper adjustment to its optical power
Figure 6-5 illustrates the process for commissioning the flatness of the channel
optical power.
Version: B 6-11
Figure 6-5 Flowchart of Commissioning the Flatness of the Channel Optical Power
Note:
u While commissioning the flatness of optical power, you need adjust

the attenuation value of each channel at the Tx end of the local
station according to the Tx power of the local station and the Rx
power of the opposite station.
u You can adjust the channel optical power with an electrical variable
optical attenuator (EVOA), a manual variable optical attenuator or a
fixed attenuator.
u To guarantee the transmission quality of each channel in the system,

it is recommended to set the wavelength division side Tx optical
power of each OTU card or line card to the same value (generally
-2dBm).
6-12 Version: B
6.5.2 Online Spectrum Test
You can query information such as the number of channels, channel wavelength,
channel power and OSNR of the optical signals via the online spectrum test.
Prerequisites
Equipment commissioning at the single station has been completed.
Procedures
You can conduct the online spectrum test via the OPM card or the spectrum
analyzer. The example of spectrum test introduced below use the OPM card.
1. Introduce the signal to be tested to the line of the OPM4 card: connect the
optical fiber between the MON port on the OA card and the I1 port on the OPM4
card (the input line 1 is used as an example).
Note:
If the spectrum analyzer is used for the test, you need connect the optical
fiber between the MON port on the OA card and the signal input port of
the spectrum analyzer.
2. Log in the OTNM2000 GUI on the network management computer. Right-click

the OPM4 card in the subrack view of the NE in which the signal to be tested is
located, and select OPCM_TEST from the shortcut menu that appears. This
operation brings up the window as illustrated in Figure 6-6.
Version: B 6-13
Figure 6-6 Spectrum Test Window of the OPM Card
3. Select Line1 in the Line options, and click the on the right side of the
Spectrum_test, then the OPM4 card began to scan each channel of the line.
4. View the result of the spectrum test: click the on the right side of the
Spectrum_test_back, and the result of scanning Line 1 is displayed on the
right lower pane of the spectrum test window, as illustrated in Figure 6-7. The
scanning result includes the number of channels, channel optical power and
OSNR of the signal to be tested.
Note:
If an alert box appears indicating that data have not been prepared, click
the button on the right side of Spectrum_test_back again.
6-14 Version: B
Figure 6-7 Spectrum Test Result of the OPM Card
Note:
Due to factors such as the card insertion loss and the split ratio at the
MON interface, the optical power values displayed in the scanning result
may be inconsistent with the actual optical power powers of each channel
in the line. In this case, you can correct the values by setting the OPBIAS
(dB) value in the Special-Config tab of the OPM card.
5. Adjust the flatness of the channel optical power according to the test result.
See Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel for detailed procedures.
6.5.3 Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel
The flatness of the optical power can be improved by adjusting optical power of
each channel.
Version: B 6-15
Prerequisites
The online spectrum test has been completed.
Procedures
The paragraphs below takes the VMU card (using the EVOA) as an example to
introduce how to adjust the channel optical power.
1. Right-click the VMU card in the NE subrack view, and select COMMAND from
the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the control command window.
2. Set the Adjust_Mode option of the VOA_ADJUST to Manual, and then click
the on the right side of the VOA_ADJUST. Click OK in the alert box that
appears, as illustrated in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8 The VOA Adjustment Control of the VMU Card
3. Right-click the VMU card in the NE subrack view, and select

CONFIGURATION from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the cad
configuration window.
4. Click the Channel-Work-Status-Config tab, and set the attenuation value for
the wavelengths in each wave band accessing the card, as illustrated in
Figure 6-9.
6-16 Version: B
4 Calculate the difference between the maximum power and minimum power
values of each single wavelength according to the spectrum test result. If
the difference value fails to meet the requirements for the flatness (the
flatness should be no more than 3dB at the MPI-S point and no more than
5dB at the MPI-R point), you need make adjustment accordingly.
4 For a wavelength with relatively high optical power, increase the

attenuation value of the channel; for a wavelength with relatively low
optical power, reduce the attenuation value of the channel to a proper
value if the channel has already been set with an attenuation value.
Figure 6-9 The Channel Working Status of the VMU Card
5. Complete the intelligent fan configuration: When the configuration is completed,

click the Write->Device button on the left side of the card configuration window,
6. Access the control command window of the VMU card, and set the
Adjust_Mode option in VOA_ADJUST to Lock. Then click the button on
the right side of the VOA_ADJUST, and select OK in the alert box that appears.
7. Implement the spectrum test. For detailed procedures see .
4 If the flatness of channel optical power fails to meet the system

requirements again, adjust the channel optical power according to the test
result once again.
Version: B 6-17
4 If the flatness of channel optical power meets the system requirements, the
commissioning of channel optical power flatness is completed.
6.6 Setting Optical Power Threshold Values
Set optical power threshold values correctly, so that the system can generate
relevant alarms in a timely manner, which helps to trigger switching and isolate the
fault points.
Prerequisite
Adjustment of the system optical power has been completed, and the system is
running stably.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000
Procedures
1. Right-click the card to be set with optical power threshold values in the
OTNM2000 GUI, and select PERFORMANCE from the shortcut menu that
appears.
2. Record the Rx and Rx optical power of the card displayed in the 15-minutes
performance GUI on the OTNM2000.
3. Right-click the card to be set with optical power threshold values in the
OTNM2000 GUI, and select CONFIGURATION from the shortcut menu that
appears.
4. Select the Optical-Interface-Config or Optical-Module-Config tab in the card

configuration window of the card, and set the optical power threshold values.
The name of the applicable tab and specific optical power configuration items
may vary from each other for different cards. See Table 6-1 for details.
6-18 Version: B
Table 6-1 Cards Applicable for Setting Optical Power Threshold Values
Optical Power Threshold

Card Name Tab Name
Configuration Item
8TA1, 8TDGF, 8TDGS, LMS2E,

2LMS2E, OTU2E, OTU2S,
OTU2F, OTU3E, 8EF, 16TA, Input_OP_Low_Threshold
Optical-Interface-
4TA2, 8TA2, 4LA2, 8LA2, TA3,
Config
10TA2
OTU3E, OTU3S, OTU3F, Input_OP_Low_Threshold, Input_OP_
LMS3E High_Threshold
Output_OP_Loss_Threshold, Output_
OMU48/40, VMU48/40 OP_Low_Threshold, Output_OP_
High_Threshold
Receive-Failure-Threshold, Input_OP_
ODU48/40, OPM4, OPM8 Low_Threshold, Input_OP_High_
Threshold
Low_Threshold, Input_OP_High_
HOA, OA, PA Threshold, Output- OS-LOS-Threshold,
Output-OP-Low-Threshold, Output-OP-
High-Threshold
Low_Threshold, Input_OP_High_
Threshold, Output- OS-LOS-Threshold,
Optical-Module- Output-OP-Low-Threshold, Output-OP-
Config High-Threshold, Intermediate-Receive-
Failure-Threshold, Intermediate_Input_
MSA
OP_Low_Threshold, Intermediate_
Input_OP_High_Threshold,
Intermediate-OS-LOS-Threshold,
Intermediate_Output-OP-Low-
Threshold, Intermediate_Output-OP-
High-Threshold
Signal-OS-LOS-Threshold, Signal_
OP_Low / High_Threshold, Output-
RAU_B, RAU_F
OS-LOS-Threshold, Output-OP-Low /
High-Threshold
OCP, OMSP, OLP_1:1, OLP_1 Receive-Failure-Threshold, Input_OP_

+1 Low_Threshold
OSC, EOSC Input_OP_Low_Threshold
Version: B 6-19
5. Paragraphs below take the OCP card as an example to introduce how to set
the optical power threshold values, as illustrated in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 Setting Optical Power Threshold of the OCP Card
6. Configure the optical power threshold values according to the rules specified in
Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Rules for Setting Optical Power Alarm Threshold
Optical Power Threshold Configuration

Configuration Rule
Item
Receive-Failure-Threshold The normal Rx optical power minus 5 dBm
Input_OP_Low_Threshold The normal Rx optical power minus 3 dBm
Input_OP_High_Threshold The normal Rx optical power plus +3 dBm
Output-OS-LOS-Threshold The normal Tx optical power plus -5 dBm
Output_OP_Low_Threshold The normal Tx optical power plus -3 dBm
Output_OP_High_Threshold The normal Tx optical power plus +3 dBm
7. When you have configured the optical power thresholds, click Write -> Device
as shown in Figure 6-10, and click OK in the command warning dialog box that
appears to deliver the configuration data to the equipment.
6-20 Version: B
6.7 Setting Dispersion Compensation for the

N×40Gbit/s System
The following introduces how to configure dispersion compensation for the

N×40Gbit/s system.
Purpose
To restrain the nonlinear effect of optical fibers in the N×40Gbit/s transmission

system and solve the problem in dispersion tolerance, users should make
reasonable compensation for the dispersion of optical fibers.
The dispersion compensation for the N×40Gbit/s system accord with specific rules.
The dispersion compensation comprises three modes: full-wave band dispersion
pre-compensation, full-wave band line dispersion compensation (compensation by
sections), as illustrated in Figure 6-11.
Version: B 6-21
Figure 6-11 Dispersion Compensation for A 40G System
u Full-wave band dispersion pre-compensation: in this mode, the DCM is set

between the OMU card and the OA card. dispersion pre-compensation is
implemented via the DCM before the signal accesses the line optical fiber for
transmission.
u Full-wave line dispersion compensation: in this mode, the DCM is set between
the PA card and the OA card, and usually the compensation is implemented by
sections to make up the repeater amplification station.
u Single-channel compensation: in this mode, after the full-wave band dispersion

pre-compensation and full-wave line dispersion compensation, the 40G OTU
card can implement self-adaptive compensation for the residual dispersion in
the single channel via the built-in TDCM module.
6-22 Version: B
Prerequisite
u Commissioning of the system optical power has been completed.
u TDCM commissioning requires the line error bit rate is less than 1e–05.
Note:
Before adjusting the channel optical power or during the process of

system optical power commissioning, loosely connect the ODU card to
the optical fiber jumper at the RX interface of the OTU card (or use an
attenuator with higher attenuation). The purpose to do so is to prevent the
self-adaptive adjustment of single-channel dispersion from being affected
by unstable performance of the Rx optical signal.
Procedures
Select a proper DCM for the full-wave band dispersion pre-compensation and the
full-wave band line dispersion according to the project design. If the line in a certain
network section is degraded and does not accord with the project design, it is
recommended for you to carry a few DCM and OA cards of different models to
replace the faulty ones while implementing commissioning and maintenance, so as
to guarantee the system transmission quality.
Usually follow the procedures below:
1. Configure the system properly according to the system dispersion management

design.
2. Adjust the optical power of each reference point of the N×40Gbit/s system and
make sure the optical power meets the requirements.
3. Set the preset value of the Tx optical power of the OTU card’s built-in OPA and
make sure the current IOP performance value of the OTU card is within the
normal receiving range (between -15dBm and -5dBm).
4. Activate the self-adaptive dispersion compensation of the 40G OTU card and
complete the compensation automatically.
You need to set the single-channel dispersion compensation on the OTNM2000.

Below are the operation procedures:
Version: B 6-23
1. In the OTNM2000 GUI, read the card status of the 40G OTU card (the OTU3S
card is used as an example) and learn about the manufacturer and the type of
the optical modules of the card.
Note:
The modulation codes of the optical modules of the 40G OTU cards
include DPSK and DQPSK.
2. Set the output optical power value for the built-in OPA of the 40G OTU card (the
OTU3S card is used as an example).
1) In the OTNM2000 GUI, right-click the corresponding OTU3S card, and

select CONFIGURATION→OA-TDCM-Config from the shortcut menu that
appears. This operation brings up the OA-TDCM-Config tab as shown in
Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 The Amplifier and TDCM Configuration Tab
2) Set the values for the Out-Power-Except and OA-Out-Power-Normal.
6-24 Version: B
Note:
u The Out-Power-Except is optical power value that the line side Rx

end optical module is expected to receive and the normally set to
7dBm.
u The OA-Out-Power-Normal is the preset output optical power value

of the line side Rx end preamplifier OA. It is used to amplify the
optical power of the Rx optical signal received via the RX interface
on the amplification card. And also it can compensate the insertion
loss (4dB) of the TDCM module within the card. Normally the value is
set to 10dBm, which is 3 to 5dB higher than the Out-Power-Except,
compliant with the Out-Power-Except standards.
3) When the configuration is completed, click the Write->Device button on

the left side of the card configuration window, and then click OK in the alert
box that appears.
3. Check the current performance reported by the 40G OTU card:
1) Right-click the corresponding OTU3S card, and select PERFORMANCE

from the shortcut menu that appears.
2) Check the performance value reported by the OTU3S card.
¡ IOP: the input optical power of the Rx module of the OTU card, which
should range between -15dBm and -5dBm.
¡ OPTOP: the output optical power of the built-in OPA, which should
accord with the preset value for the output optical power of the OA
card.
¡ OTN_PIN_IOP: the input optical power of the PIN module at the OTN
side. The value of this item should meet the specification concerned
and accord with the expected value for the OTP input optical power.
Version: B 6-25
Note:
Adjust the optical power at each reference point in the N×40Gbit/s

system to proper values. Having set the preset value for the output
optical power of the built-in OPA of the OTU card, check whether the
current IOP performance value of the 40G OTU card is in the normal
range range (between -15dBm and -5dBm). Make sure that the aforesaid
requirements are fully met before connecting the optical fiber jumper from
the ODU card to the Rx interface on the 40G OTU card,so as to perform
the self-adapt dispersion compensation.
4. Set the self-adaptive dispersion compensation for the 40G OTU card:
1) Access the OA-TDCM-Config tab with reference to Step 1, and set the
self-adaptive dispersion compensation. The result of setting is as shown in
Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Setting TDCM Self-adaptive Dispersion Compensation
2) Set each parameter for the TDCM. Below are the definitions of each
parameter:
¡ TDCM-Dispersion-Compensation: when you set TDCM to Manual,

the card will implement dispersion compensation according to the set
value for this item. The default value is 0. In actual applications, you
6-26 Version: B
can manually set the value to the dispersion compensation value

reported by the current performance parameter after successful card
ADC automatic justification.
¡ Set the TDCM adaptive dispersion compensation to Actived: The

TDCM module performs automatic dispersion compensation for the
received signal (the adaptive value is selected automatically).
¡ Set the TDCM adaptive dispersion compensation to Forbidden: The

TDCM module remain the current dispersion compensation value
unchanged and perform compensation according to the fixed value
(which can be queried in the current performance).
¡ When you set the TDCM to Manual, you can set a specific value for
the Out-Power-Expect, and the system will implement the
compensation according to the set value.
5. Check the status reported by the 40G OTU card:
1) Wait for about 15 minutes and right-click the corresponding OUT3S card,
and select STATUS from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the
card status GUI.
2) Check the ADC status of the self-adaptive dispersion compensation, when

the status indicates a successful adjustment, the single-channel dispersion
compensation of the OTU card succeeds.
6.8 Commissioning Example for the N×10Gbit/s

System
In the following, a specific example is given to help users get acquainted with the
commissioning of the N×10Gbit/s system.
6.8.1 Network Overview
Example of Optical Power Commissioning at A Single Station is used in this

example, for other network situations refer to Project Information.
Version: B 6-27
6.8.2 Commissioning Order
General Orders for Commissioning
1. Commission the flatness and OSRN at each network section in sequence

along the signal flow route.
4 The flatness of channel optical power at the MPI-R reference point at each
station should be no more than 5dB.
4 The flatness of channel optical power at the MPI-S reference point at each
4 The OSNR at the MPI-S reference point at each station should be no less
than 18dB.
than 35dB.
2. When you have completed the commissioning of the flatness and OSNR at
each network section, you need check the flatness of channel optical power
and OSNR from the initial station to the end station along the route of signal
flow.
4 If the flatness and OSNR measured from the initial station to the end
station fail to meet requirements, make adjustment to the values of flatness
and OSNR of each network section so that they are well balanced with
4 If the values still fail to meet the commissioning requirements after

adjustment, check whether the design could meet the networking
requirement.
3. After the system is operating stably, set the optical power threshold values of
each card.
Example of Commissioning Order
In the WDM system, the station between two non-OLA stations is usually
considered as a network section. Each network section contains two signal flows:
one in the Rx direction, and the other in the Tx direction. Commission the channel
optical power at each network section one by one along the route of signal flow.
6-28 Version: B
Note:
While implementing system commissioning, make sure that project
engineers have been assigned to both the Tx station and Rx station at
each network section. The maintenance personnel in the network
management center coordinate and direct these project engineers, and
the equipment maintenance personnel at each station cooperate with
each other closely.
For example, a project networking is shown in Figure 6-14. Stations A, B, C and D

all use the FONST 5000s to make up a chain network. Station A and Station D are
OTM stations; Station B is an OLA station, and Station C is an OADM station.
Figure 6-14 Sequence of Channel Optical Power Testing – Example of Commissioning the
N×10Gbit/s System
The project comprises two network sections: A - B - C and C - D. Commission the

flatness of the network sections in the signal flow direction A→B→C→D in the
following sequence:
1. Commission the flatness of the network section A - B - C, i.e. the flatness at the
MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at Station C (toward Station B).
The OSNR at the reference points should meet the requirements as well.
2. Commission the flatness of the C－D network section, i.e. the flatness at the
MPI-S point (toward Station D) and the flatness at the MPI-R point at Station D.
Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network sections in the signal flow
direction D→C→B→A in the following sequence:
Version: B 6-29
1. Commission the flatness of the network section C - D, i. e. the flatness at the

MPI-S point at Station D and the MPI-R point at Station C (toward Station D).
2. Commission the flatness of the A－B - C network section, i.e. the flatness at the
MPI-S point (toward Station B) and the flatness at the MPI-R point at Station A.
Commission the flatness and OSNR of the A - B - C - D system in the following

sequence:
1. Check the flatness and OSNR in the Tx direction from Station A to Station D, i.
e., the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point
at Station D. If the two items fail to meet requirements concerned, adjust the
flatness and OSNR of each network section so that they are well balanced.
2. Check the flatness and OSNR in the Tx direction from Station D to Station A, i.
e., the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station D and the MPI-R point
at Station A. If the two items fail to meet requirements concerned, adjust the
flatness and OSNR of each network section so that they are well balanced.
When the system operation become stable, set the optical power threshold values
for each card, so that the system can generate relevant alarms in a timely manner,
which helps trigger switching and isolate fault points.
6.8.3 Procedures of System Commissioning
The following introduces the procedures for joint-commissioning the flatness and
OSNR of the N×10Gbit/s system.
Prerequisites
Commissioning of a single equipment set has been completed.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, a spectrum analyzer or an OPM card, a small screwdriver
6-30 Version: B
Procedures
Commission the system flatness and OSNR of each network section with reference
to Commissioning Order.
1. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network section A - B - C, i.e. the
flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at
Station C (toward Station B). See Figure 6-15 for the reference points at Station
A; and see Figure 6-16 for the reference points at Station C.
Figure 6-15 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A – Example of Commissioning
the N×10Gbit/s System
Version: B 6-31
Figure 6-16 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station C – Example of Commissioning
Note:
For other types of OADM stations, the reference point MPI-S is set at the
OUT interface of the OA card, and the reference point MPI-R is set at the
OUT interface of the PA card.
6-32 Version: B
1) Check the channel optical power: connect the spectrum analyzer or the
OPM card to the MON interface on the OA card at Station C (Tx) to
measure the optical power of each channel.
2) (Optional) (Optional) Adjust the difference between the optical power in the
CE-/CO-band: adjust the CO and CE buttons on the ITL50 card panel
respectively with a small screwdriver to minimum the difference between
the optical power in the CE-/CO-band.
Note:
u The way to adjust the CO and CE buttons: turn the buttons clockwise
to reduce the attenuation and turn them counterclockwise to
increase the attenuation.
u While adjusting the buttons, make sure that you turn the buttons
gradually and slowly with reference to the test results of the
spectrum analyzer.
u While reducing the difference between the channel optical power of

the CE-/CO-band, make sure that you are doing to reduce the
attenuation of the ITL50 card as much as possible.
3) Adjust the channel optical power of the CE-/CO-band: adjust the optical
power of each channel via the variable optical attenuator inside the
VMU48-O card and the VMU48-E card. It is supposed that the optical
spectrum meter displays the following results: CO1=-16dBm, CO48=-
17dBm, CE1=-18dBm and CE48=-19dBm.
Note:
The optical power at the MON interface of the OA card accounts for only
1% of the main optical path power. The optical power of each channel at
the MON interface measured by the spectrum analyzer plus 20dBm can
be considered as the approximate value of the actual optical power at the
MON interface.
4) Commission the flatness and OSNR: while adjusting the channel optical
power at the MPI-S point at Station A, make sure to observe the flatness
Version: B 6-33
and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station C. The commissioning rule is that
while meeting the requirements for the flatness and OSNR at the Tx end,
make sure that the flatness and OSNR at the Rx end can reach the best
level.
Note:
u It is required that the flatness at the MPI-S point should be no more

than 3dB, the OSNR at the MPI-S should be no less than 35dB; the
flatness at the MPI-R point should be no more than 5dB, and the
OSNR at the MPI-R point should be no less than 18dB.
u The multiplexer cards used in the system are OMU serial cards. If an
OMU card has no EVOA inside it, adjust the optical power of each
channel by adding or reducing the number of optical attenuators at
the wavelength division side interface of the OTU card.
5) Suppose that the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station C
(toward Station B) reaches the best level, and that the optical power values
of each channel at Station A are as follows: CO1=-18dBm, CO48=-18dBm,
CE1=-18dBm, CE48=-19dBm. In this case, the configuration is as follows:
¡ In the Channel-Work-Status-Config tab on the card configuration

GUI of the VMU48-O card, set the attenuation value of the CO1
channel to 2, and set the attenuation value of the CO48 channel to 1.

GUI of the VMU48-E card, set the attenuation value of the CE1
channel to 0, and set the attenuation value of the CE48 channel to 0.
2. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network section C- D, i. e. the

flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station C and the MPI-R point at
Station C (toward Station D). See Figure 6-17 for the reference points at Station
D.
6-34 Version: B
Figure 6-17 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station D – Example of Commissioning
1) Set the pre-attenuation value: suppose that the optical power of the CE1
and CO1 straight-through channels at Station C is -6dBm, the output
optical power of the OTU cards connected to the CE48 and CO48 adding /
dropping channels is -2dBm. In this case, the configuration is as follows:
¡ Set the attenuation value of the CO48 channel to 4dBm: set the
attenuation value of CO48 channel to 4 in the Channel-Work-Status-
Config tab on the card configuration GUI of the VMU48-O card.
¡ Set the attenuation value of the CE48 channel to 4dBm: set the
attenuation value of CE48 channel to 4 in the Channel-Work-Status-
Config tab on the card configuration GUI of the VMU48-E card.
Version: B 6-35
Note:
u For the OADM station using the WSS and OMU cards: If the OMU
card has no EVOA inside it, adjust the optical power of each channel
by adding or reducing the number of optical attenuators at the
WDMside interface of the OTU card.
u For the OADM station using the SOAD card: adjust the optical power
of each channel with the manual attenuator inside the SOAD card.
Refer to Hardware Description for operation procedures.
u For the OADM station using WSS+ODU cards, WSS card or WSS
card groups: adjust the optical power of each channel with the EVOA
inside the WSS card. The operation procedures are similar to those
for the VMU card.
OPM card to the MON interface on the OA card at Station D (Tx) to
3) (Optional) (Optional) Adjust the difference between the optical power in the
CE-/CO-band: adjust the CO and CE buttons on the ITL50 card panel
respectively with a small screwdriver to minimum the difference between
the optical power in the CE-/CO-band.
4) Adjust the channel optical power of the CE-/CO-band: adjust the optical
power of each channel via the variable optical attenuator inside the
VMU48-O card and the VMU48-E card. It is supposed that the optical
spectrum meter displays the following results: CO1=-16dBm, CO48=-
17dBm, CE1=-18dBm and CE48=-19dBm.
power at the MPI-S point at Station C, make sure to observe the flatness
and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station D. The commissioning rule is that
level.
6-36 Version: B
Note:
The OADM stations in different modes have different ways to commission
the channel optical power. Operate with reference to the procedures for
setting pre-attenuation value and the notes given.
6) Suppose that when the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station D
reaches the best level, the optical power values of each channel at Station
C are as follows: CO1=-18dBm, CO48=-18dBm, CE1=-18dBm, CE48=-
19dBm. In this case, the configuration is as follows:

GUI of the VMU48-O card, set the attenuation value of the CO1
channel to 2, and set the attenuation value of CO48 channel to 5.

GUI of the VMU48-E card, set the attenuation value of CE1 channel to
0, and set the attenuation value of CE48 channel to 4.
Note:
Configuration of the attenuation adjustment values for the CE48 and
CO48 channels is based on the pre-attenuation values for these
channels.
3. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the system in the signal flow direction of
D→C→B→A: commission the flatness and OSNR at the D - C network section
with reference o Step 1; and commission the flatness and OSNR at the C - B -
A network section with reference o Step 2.
4. Commission the flatness and OSNR in the Tx direction from Station A to

Station D, i.e. the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station A and the
MPI-R point at Station D.
1) If the flatness and OSNR measured from the initial station to the end
reference to Step 1 to Step 2.
Version: B 6-37
2) If the values still fail to meet the commissioning requirements after

requirement.
5. Commission the flatness and OSNR in the Tx direction from Station D to

Station A, i.e. the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station D and the
MPI-R point at Station A.
1) If the values mentioned above fail to meet requirements, make adjustment

to the values of flatness and OSNR of each network section so that they
are well balanced with reference to Step 3.
2) If the values still fail to meet the commissioning requirements after

requirement.
6. When the system operation becomes stable, configure the optical power
threshold values for each card with reference to the methods and rules
introduced in Setting Optical Power Threshold Values.
4 Suppose the normal Tx optical power of the VMU48-E card at Station A is

-6dBm, then the output optical signal LOS threshold for the card is -11dBm.

-6dBm, then the output optical power overlow threshold for the card is
-9dBm.

-6dBm, then the output optical power overhigh threshold for the card is
-3dBm.

System
Commissioning of the N×40Gbit/s requires a higher precision that that of the

N×10Gbit/s and lower-rate systems. The following introduces the commissioning
procedures for a long-haul multi-span 48 channel ×40Gbit/s link system to acquaint
users with the commissioning for the N×40Gbit/s system.
6-38 Version: B
Network Overview
Introduction to the network: see Figure 6-18 for the networking and service
allocation in a project. Stations A, B, C and D all use the FONST 5000s to make up
a chain network. Station A and Station D are OTM stations; Station B and Station C
are OLA stations.
Introduction to line: see Figure 6-18 for the transmission distance and line
attenuation between stations. The G.652 optical fiber is used in the line. The CD
(Chromatic Dispersion) of the optical fiber is less than 17ps/km.nm, and the PMD
(Polarization Mode Dispersion) of the optical fiber is less than 0.1ps/ .
Service demand: 10 channels of 40Gbit/s services are to be transmitted between

Station A and Station D. See Figure 6-18 for the service and wavelength allocation.
Figure 6-18 System Network – Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System
Amplifier Card and DCM Configuration Diagram
Set the optical amplifier and the DCM according to the line distance and optical
dispersion coefficient of each span, as illustrated in Figure 6-19.
Version: B 6-39
Figure 6-19 Amplification Card and DCM Configuration – Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
Card Configuration
See Figure 6-20 and Figure 6-21 for card configuration at each station in the project.
6-40 Version: B
Figure 6-20 Card Configuration at Station A and Station D - Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
Version: B 6-41
Figure 6-21 Card Configuration at Station B and Station C - Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
Optical Fiber Connection
See Figure 6-22 and Figure 6-23 for card configuration at each station in the project.
6-42 Version: B
Figure 6-22 Fiber Connection at Station A and Station D - Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
Figure 6-23 Fiber Connection at Station B and Station C - Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
Version: B 6-43
Card Parameters
Table 6-3 Optical Power Parameters–Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System

OTU3S 0 to 3 -6 to 3 -5 to 5 -14 to 0
OSC －－ -7 to -2 -45 to -3
Note 1: The OTU3S cards in this example use the optical modules with the NRZ-DPSK modulation.
See Table 6-4 for the parameters of the optical amplification cards at each station in
the project.
Table 6-4 Parameters of the Amplification Card – Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s
System
Number of Channels That Saturation Output Optical

Card Name Gain (dB)
Can be Amplified Power (dBm)
OA 48 18 21
PA 48 14 14
project.
Table 6-5 Insertion Loss Parameters – Commissioning Example for the N×40Gbit/s System
Card Name Insertion Loss Index

The insertion loss is no more than 7dB when the VOA is
VMU48 (dB) 0dB. The deviation for insertion loss is no more than 1.
2dB.
The insertion loss is no more than 6.5dB. The deviation
ODU48 (dB)
for insertion loss is no more than 1.5dB.
The insertion loss in the OSC is no more than 1.0dB;
OSCAD (dB) and the insertion loss in the main optical path is no more
than 0.6dB.
DCM (20km) (dB) ≤ 3.3
DCM (80km) (dB) ≤ 8.0
Pigtail (dB) ≤ 0.5
6-44 Version: B
1. Set the expected output optical value of the amplifier of each OTU card.
4 When the commissioning format of the OTU card is DQPSK, the internal
amplifier should be set to 6 dBm.
4 When the commissioning format of the OTU card is DPSK, the internal
amplifier should be set to 10 dBm.

than 18dB.
3. When you have completed the commissioning of the flatness and OSNR at
each network section, you need check the flatness of channel optical power
and OSNR from the initial station to the end station along the route of signal
flow.
4 If the flatness and OSNR measured from the initial station to the end
reference to Step 1 to Step 3.

requirement.
4. Setting the TDCM self-adaptive dispersion compensation for each OTU card.
each card.
Version: B 6-45
In the WDM system, the station between two non-OLA stations is usually
considered as a network section. Each network section contains two signal flows:
one in the Rx direction, and the other in the Tx direction. Commission the channel
optical power at each network section one by one along the route of signal flow.
Note:
each other closely.
For example, a project networking is shown in Figure 6-24. Stations A, B, C and D

all use the FONST 5000s to make up a chain network. Station A and Station D are
OTM stations; Station B and Station C are OLA stations.
N×40Gbit/s System
From Figure 6-24, the project has only one network section, i.e. A－B－C－D.
Commission the flatness and OSNR of this network section in the following
sequence:
1. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction A→B→C→D, i. e. the

flatness at the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at Station D.
Meanwhile, make sure the OSNR at the reference points meet the
requirements as well.
6-46 Version: B
2. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction D→C→B→A, i. e. the

flatness at the MPI-S point at Station D and the MPI-R point at Station A.
Meanwhile, make sure the OSNR at the reference points meet the
requirements as well.
Prerequisites
Commissioning of a single equipment set has been completed.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, a spectrum analyzer or an OPM card
Procedures
1. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network section A→B→C→D, i.e.
the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at
Station C (toward Station B). See Figure 6-25 for the reference points at Station
A and Station C.
Version: B 6-47
Figure 6-25 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A and Station D – Example of
Commissioning the N×40Gbit/S System
OPM card to the MON interface on the OA card at Station D (Tx) to
2) Adjust the channel optical power: adjust the optical power of each channel
via the variable optical attenuator inside the VMU48-E card. Suppose that
the OPM4 card displays the optical power of each channel as shown in
Table 6-6.
6-48 Version: B
Table 6-6 Optical Power Values of Each Channel Displayed by the OPM4 Card – Example of
Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System
Optical Power Value Displayed by the OPM4 Card (with Optical Power
Wavelength
Bias of 0dBm)
CE39 -13 dBm

CE40 -14 dBm
CE41 -16 dBm
CE42 -16 dBm
CE43 -15 dBm
CE44 -16 dBm
CE45 -13 dBm
CE46 -15 dBm
CE47 -15 dBm
CE48 -14 dBm
Note:
u The optical power at the MON interface of the OA card accounts for
only 1% of the main optical path power. The optical power of each
channel measured at the MON interface of the OPM4 card plus
20dBm can be considered as the approximate value of the actual
optical power at the MON interface.
u You can set the value of OP-BIAS (dB) in the Special-Config tab on
the configuration GUI of the OPM4 card, so that the OPM4 card can
display the optical power values of each channel close to the actual
values.
and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station D. The commissioning rule is that
level.
Version: B 6-49
Note:

than 3dB, the flatness at the MPI-R point should be no more than
4dB, and the OSNR at the MPI-R point should be no less than 18dB.
u If the multiplexer cards used in the system are OMU serial cards,
when an OMU card has no EVOA inside it, adjust the optical power
of each channel by adding or reducing the number of optical
attenuators at the wavelength division side interface of the OTU
card.
4) Suppose that the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station D reach
the best level, and the optical power values of each channel at Station A
and the attenuation values for each channel in the configuration GUI of the
VMU48-E card are as shown in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 Optical Power of Each Channel and Attenuation Values of Each VMU Channel -
Example of Commissioning the N×40Gbit/s System
Attenuation Value of Each Optical Power Value Displayed by the OPM4 Card (with
Wavelength
Channel in the VMU48-E Card Optical Power Bias of 0dBm)
CE39 2dB -15 dBm

CE40 1dB -15 dBm
CE41 0dB -16 dBm
CE42 0dB -16 dBm
CE43 0dB -15 dBm
CE44 0dB -16 dBm
CE45 2dB -15 dBm
CE46 0dB -15 dBm
CE47 0dB -15 dBm
CE48 1dB -15 dBm
2. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network section in the signal flow
direction D→C→B→A in the following sequence with reference to Step 2:
6-50 Version: B
Note:
Since the system has only one network section, the initial station and end
station of the network section are the initial station and end station of the
system. The step for checking the flatness and OSNR of the entire
system can be omitted here.
3. Set the amplifier and dispersion compensation of the OTU card: set the
expected output optical power of each OTU3S card and the TDCM self-
adaptive dispersion compensation with reference to General Rules for
Commissioning.
1) Check the status of the OTU3S card via the network management system.
For the OTU3S card with NRZ-DPSK modulation code, set the OA
expected output optical power value of this card to 10dBm.
2) Right-click the OTU3S card to be configured, and select

CONFIGURATION from the shortcut menu that appears to access of card
configuration GUI.
3) Click the OA-TDCM-Config tab and set the expected output optical power
of the amplifier (OA-Out-Power-Normal) and TDCM self-adaptive
dispersion compensation (TDCM) of the OTU3S card, as shown in
Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26 Amplification Card and TDCM Configuration – Example of Commissioning the
N×40Gbit/s System
4) Wait for 15 minutes and check the card status. The card status will display
that the self-adaptive dispersion compensation is successful.
Version: B 6-51
4 Suppose that the normal Tx optical power of the VMU48-E card at Station
A is 2dBm, then the output optical signal LOS threshold for the card is
-3dBm.
A is 2dBm, then the output optical power overlow threshold for the card is
-1dBm.
A is 2dBm, then the output optical power overhigh threshold for the card is
-5dBm.

System
In the following, a specific example is given to help users get acquainted with the
commissioning of the N×100Gbit/s system.
Network Overview
u Introduction to the network: see Figure 6-27 for the networking in a project.
Stations A to O all use the FONST 5000s to make up a chain network. Station
A and Station O are OTM stations; intermediate stations are OLA stations.
u Introduction to line: see Figure 6-27 for the transmission distance and line
attenuation between stations. The G.655 optical fiber is used in the line. During
the transmission the gain of the amplifier station can compensate the line
optical power attenuation. Within 300km the WSS card can adjust the channel
optical power.
u Service demand: 8 channels of 100GE services are to be transmitted between

Station A and Station O. The OTU4S card is used as the optical transponder
card. See Figure 6-27 for the service and wavelength allocation.
6-52 Version: B
Figure 6-27 System Network Diagram-Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System
Version: B 6-53
Card Configuration
See Figure 6-28, Figure 6-29 and Figure 6-30 for card configuration at each station
in the project.
Note:
The card configuration of Station A is the same with that of Station O. The
card configuration of Stations B, C, D, F, G, H, I, K, L and M are the same.
The card configuration of Station E, J and N are the same.
Figure 6-28 Card Configuration Diagram for Station A - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System
6-54 Version: B
Figure 6-29 Card Configuration Diagram for Station B - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System
Figure 6-30 Card Configuration Diagram for Station E - Example of Commissioning the
N×100Gbit/s System
Optical Fiber Connectors
See Figure 6-31, Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33 for the optical fiber connection at
Version: B 6-55
Note:
The optical fiber connection at Station A is similar to that at Station O.

The optical fiber connection at Stations B, C, D, F, G, H, I, K, L and M are
similar. The optical fiber connection of Station E, J and N are the similar.
Note 1: The OTU4S card serves as both the Tx card and the Rx card. That is, the OTU4S card in
the solid line box and the one in the dashed line box for the same wavelength in the
diagram above are actually the same card.
Figure 6-31 Optical Fiber Connection at Station A - Example of Commissioning the

N×100Gbit/s System
6-56 Version: B
Figure 6-32 Optical Fiber Connection at Station B - Example of Commissioning the

N×100Gbit/s System
Figure 6-33 Optical Fiber Connection at Station E - Example of Commissioning the

N×100Gbit/s System
Card Parameters
Version: B 6-57
Table 6-8 Optical Power Parameters–Example of Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System

OTU4S -1.3 to 4.5 -8.6 to 4.5 -5 to 5 -18 to 0

OSC －－ -7 to -2 -45 to -3
project.
Table 6-9 Insertion Loss Parameters – Commissioning Example for the N×100Gbit/s System
Card Name Insertion Loss Index (dB)
The insertion loss is no more than 7dB when the VOA is 0dB. The deviation for insertion
VMU48
loss is no more than 1.2dB.
The insertion loss is no more than 6.5dB. The deviation for insertion loss is no more than
ODU48
1.5dB.
WSS8M The dropping insertion loss is no more than 4.
WSS8D The adding insertion loss is no more than 4.
The insertion loss in the OSC is no more than 1.0dB; and the insertion loss in the main
OSCAD
optical path is no more than 0.6dB.
Pigtail Attenuation is no more than 0.5.

than 18dB.
6-58 Version: B

requirement.
each card.
As shown in Figure 6-34, Stations A to O all use the FONST 5000s to make up a
chain network. The Station A and Station O are OTM stations and the intermediate
stations are OLA stations.
Note:
each other closely.
N×100Gbit/s System
See Figure 6-34 that three stations in the service path are added with the channel
power regulator (the WSS card). This project can be divided into four network
segments (A↔E, E↔J, J↔N and N↔O). You can adjust the flatness and signal-to-
noise ratio for the network segments following the commissioning order below.
Version: B 6-59
1. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction A→E, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at Station E. Meanwhile, make
sure the OSNR at the reference points meet the requirements as well.
2. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction E→J, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station E and the MPI-R point at Station J. Meanwhile, make
3. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction J→N, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station J and the MPI-R point at Station N. Meanwhile, make
4. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction N→O, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station N and the MPI-R point at Station O. Meanwhile,
make sure the OSNR at the reference points meet the requirements as well.
5. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction O→N, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station O and the MPI-R point at Station N. Meanwhile,
6. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction N→J, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station N and the MPI-R point at Station J. Meanwhile, make
7. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction J→E, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station D and the MPI-R point at Station E. Meanwhile,
8. Commission the flatness in the signal flow direction E→A, i. e. the flatness at
the MPI-S point at Station E and the MPI-R point at Station A. Meanwhile, make
Note:
The procedure for adjusting the channel optical power flatness of the
WSS card (stations E, J and N) is similar to that of the VMU card (stations
A and O), referring to Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel.
6-60 Version: B
Prerequisites
Equipment commissioning at the single station has been completed.
Tool / Instrument
u The OTNM2000
u A spectrum analyzer or an OPM card
Procedures
1. Commission the flatness and OSNR of the network section A→E, i.e. the
flatness and OSNR at the MPI-S point at Station A and the MPI-R point at
Station E. See Figure 6-35 and Figure 6-36 for the reference points at Station A
and Station E.
Version: B 6-61
Note 1: The OTU4S card can transmit and receive. The OTU4S cardsin solid and dashed frames
of the same wavelength in the figure are the same OTU4S card.
Figure 6-35 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station A and Station O – Example of
6-62 Version: B
Figure 6-36 Optical Power Testing of Each Channel at Station E, Station J and Station N –
OPM card to the MON interface on the OA card at Station A (Tx Station E)
to measure the optical power of each channel.
2) Adjust the channel optical power: adjust the optical power of each channel
via the variable optical attenuator inside the VMU48-E card of Station A.
Suppose that the OPM4 card displays the optical power of each channel
as shown in Table 6-10.
Optical Power Value Displayed by the OPM4 Card (with Optical

Wavelength
Power Bias of 0dBm)
CE1 -13dBm
CE2 -14 dBm
CE3 -15dBm
CE4 -13dBm
CE5 -12dBm
CE6 -16dBm
Version: B 6-63
Commissioning the N×100Gbit/s System (Continued)
Optical Power Value Displayed by the OPM4 Card (with Optical

Wavelength
Power Bias of 0dBm)
CE7 -11dBm
CE8 -13dBm
Note:
u According to the OA card expectation formula: output optical power
expectation = saturated output power - 10lg (N is the total wave

number that can be amplified of the OA card and n is the actual
amplified wave number), you can verify the power of n channels
multiplexed wave of the OA card.
u According to the formula: power of n channels of multiplexed waves

(dBm) = 10lgn + average value of single wave power (dBm), you can
calculate the average value of each single wave power.
u The optical power at the MON interface of the OA card accounts for
only 1% of the main optical path power. According to that
10lg100=20, the optical power of each channel measured at the
MON interface of the OPM4 card plus 20dBm can be considered as
the approximate value of the actual optical power of each single
wave.
u You can set the value of OP-BIAS (dB) in the Special-Config tab on
the configuration GUI of the OPM4 card, so that the OPM4 card can
display the optical power values of each channel close to the actual
values.
and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station E. The commissioning rule is that
level.
6-64 Version: B
Note:

than 4dB, the flatness at the MPI-R point should be no more than
5dB, and the OSNR at the MPI-R point should be no less than 18dB.
u If the multiplexer cards used in the system are OMU serial cards,
when an OMU card has no VOA inside it, adjust the optical power of
each channel by adding or reducing the number of optical
attenuators at the wavelength division side interface of the OTU
card.
4) Suppose that the flatness and OSNR at the MPI-R point at Station D reach
the best level, and the optical power values of each channel at Station A
and the attenuation values for each channel in the Configuration GUI of
the VMU48-E card are as shown in Table 6-11.
Table 6-11 Optical Power of Each Channel and Attenuation Values of Each VMU Channel -
Attenuation Value of Each Optical Power Value Displayed by the OPM4 Card (with
Wavelength
Channel in the VMU48-E Card Optical Power Bias of 0dBm)
CE1 0dB -13dBm

CE2 0dB -14 dBm
CE3 0dB -15 dBm
CE4 0dB -13 dBm
CE5 1dB -13 dBm
CE6 0dB -16 dBm
CE7 2dB -13 dBm
CE8 0dB -13 dBm
direction E→J in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
Version: B 6-65
Note:
The procedure for adjusting the optical power flatness of the WSS card
(stations E, J and N) is similar to that of the VMU card (stations A and O),
referring to Adjusting the Optical Power of Each Channel.
direction J→N in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
direction N→O in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
Note:
In this example, the WSS card are configured for the 100G network within
300km, so as to adjust the channel optical power by segments. The anti-
clockwise commissioning procedure are similar.
direction O→N in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
direction N→J in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
direction J→E in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
direction E→A in the following sequence with reference to Step 1:
4 Suppose that the normal output optical power of the VMU48-E card at
Station A is 4dBm, then the output optical signal LOS threshold for the
card can be set to -1dBm.
Station A is 4dBm, then the output optical signal Over_Low_Power
threshold for the card can be set to 1dBm.
6-66 Version: B
Station A is 4dBm, then the output optical signal Over_High_Power
threshold for the card can be set to 7dBm.
Version: B 6-67
7 Creating Services
Having completed equipment commissioning and enabled monitoring of all the

equipment in the network via the network management system, you can perform
service related configurations, such as card parameters, electrical cross-connect,
optical cross-connect, protection and overhead, in the OTNM2000 GUI according to
the Wavelength Assignment Diagram or specific user requirements. Refer to
Configuration Guide for the configuration methods.
Version: B 7-1
8 Testing Bit Errors
The overall network bit error test is required to cover all service channels. You can
perform the test either by concatenating the service channels or by dividing the
overall network into the upper and lower sections and testing them separately. It is
required that no bit error appears in a 24-hour test period.
Testing Single Channel Error
Testing Overall Channel Error
Version: B 8-1
8.1 Testing Single Channel Error
You should firstly perform the error test on each single channel for 15 minutes to
ensure smooth progress of the error test on the entire network.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, SDH signal analyzer, fixed optical attenuator, optical fiber jumper
Prerequisites
You have set up the wavelength channel to be tested between stations.
Operation Diagram
The optical fiber connection for single channel error test is illustrated in Figure 8-1.
In this figure, the OTU3S card is tested. The fiber connection between the OTU3S
cards’ wavelength division side optical interfaces at the local and far ends is omitted
in the figure.
Figure 8-1 Error Test Connection of The A Single Channel
Procedures
1. At Station A, connect the SDH error detector’s Rx and Tx optical interfaces with
the OTU3S card’s client side OUT and IN interfaces through the fixed optical
attenuator respectively.
2. At Station B, connect the OTU3S card’s client side OUT interface with the IN
interface through the fixed optical attenuator to enable loopback of signals.
3. Perform error test on the service channel with the SDH error detector for 15
minutes.
8-2 Version: B
4. If any error occurs, you should find out the reason and troubleshoot the fault.
Then start the error test for another 15 minutes. Repeat this operation until no
error occurs.
5. Follow Steps 1 to Step 4 to test perform the 15-minute error test on each
channel between Stations A and B.
6. After the test is completed, cancel the OTU3S card’s client side loopback at
Station B.
8.2 Testing Overall Channel Error
The overall channel error test is to ascertain whether all cards and channels in the
Tx link can work normally.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, SDH signal analyzer, fixed optical attenuator, optical fiber jumper
Operation Diagram
Suppose five wavelength channels are set up between Stations A and B, the
OTU3S card acts as the optical transponder card, and the service channel
concatenation mode is used; then the optical fiber connection diagram of the
corresponding overall channel error test is shown in Figure 8-2. In this figure, the
fiber connection between the OTU3S cards’ wavelength division side optical
interfaces at the local and far ends is omitted.
Version: B 8-3
Figure 8-2 Error Test Connection of All Channels
Prerequisites
You have set up each channels to be tested between stations.
Procedures
1. Complete fiber connection at Station A.
1) Connect the OUT interface of the SDH signal analyzer and the IN interface
of the first OTU3S card with the pigtail.
2) Connect the OUT interface of the first OTU3S card with the IN interface of
the second OTU3S card with the pigtail.
3) Connect the second thought the Nth single channel in series in the same
way as introduced above.
4) Connect the OUT interface of the Nth (it is recommended that N≤13)
OTU3S card wit the IN interface of the SDH signal analyzer with the pigtail.
Note:
While connecting the pigtails, you need adjust the optical power to be
within the best range of Rx optical power for the OTU3S card with fixed
attenuators.
8-4 Version: B
2. Complete the optical fiber connection at Station B: perform loopback at the

OUT interfaces and IN interfaces of all OTU3S cards.
3. Implement the 24-hour bit error test with the SDH analyzer. If the service is
blocked or bit errors are generated, hunter for the fault level by level.
1) Connect the signal output from the OUT interface of the 4th OTU3S card at
Station A to the IN interface of the SDH signal analyzer. Then check
whether the cascade connection of the first four service channels is
unblocked and whether any bit error occurs.
¡ If the connection of the four channels are unblocked and no bit error is
found, the fault is located at a relevant card in the fifth channel. When
you have removed the fault, perform the 24-hour bit error test for the
five channels in cascade connection until the bit errors disappear.
¡ If the cascade connection of the first four channels are blocked,

connect the signal output from the OUT interface of the 3rd OTU3S
card at Station A to the IN interface of the SDH signal analyzer. Then
check whether the cascade connection of the first three service
channels is unblocked and whether any bit error occurs.
2) Isolate and remove the fault in the way as introduced above, and then
perform the 24-hour bit error test for the five channels in cascade
connection until the bit errors disappear.
4. When the test is completed, cancel the loopback at the client side of the
OTU3S cards at Station A and Station B.
Version: B 8-5
9 Testing the Network-level Protection
Functions at the Optical Layer
The FONST 5000 provides multiple network-level protection modes at the optical
layer. See Product Description for the principles of each protection mode. See
Configuration Guide for the configuration principles and configuration examples for
each protection mode.
Testing Optical channel 1 +1 Wavelength Protection
Testing Optical channel 1+1 Route Protection
Testing 1 +1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching
Testing Optical Line 1:1 Protection
Testing Optical Line 1+1 Protection
Version: B 9-1
9.1 Testing Optical channel 1 +1 Wavelength

Protection
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the OCP cards in the
system can operate normally by testing the optical channel 1 +1 wavelength
protection.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, SDH signal analyzer, pigtails, fixed optical attenuator
Optical Fiber Connection Diagram
In this protection mode, the OCP card is located between the client side equipment
and the OTU card. Suppose that the service in the 21st channel between two
stations has been configured with the optical channel 1+1 wavelength protection.
See Figure 9-1 for the connection diagram for the test.
Figure 9-1 Optical Channel 1+1 Wavelength Protection Schematic Diagram
9-2 Version: B
9 Testing the Network-level Protection Functions at the Optical Layer
Prerequisites
u The optical channel 1+1 channel protection has been properly configured.
Note:
u For the OCP card, set the protection mode to channel protection
power detection mode, the WTR time to 3 min, and the delay time to
0ms.
u For the OTU2S card, enable the automatic optical line protection in
positive direction and disable the one in negative direction.
Procedures
In the following example, protection switching at Station B is tested to introduce the

testing procedures.
1. Connect the instrument for test.
1) At Station A, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 1’s input and output
optical interfaces with the OCP card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the
fixed optical attenuator respectively.
2) At Station B, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 2’s input and output
optical interfaces with the OCP card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the
3) Configure the instrument so that it sends STM-64 signals. Observe the

instrument and make sure that the service is unblocked.
2. Query channel status at Station A and Station B in normal conditions:
1) Query the OCP card: STATUS→OCP-status, as shown in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Optical Channel 1+1 Channel Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
The protection uses the OCP card’s
Line number OCP-1 OCP-1 OUT1 and IN1 interfaces, so the line
No. is shown as OCP-1.
Version: B 9-3
(Continued)
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
Channel Working Working Working
—
Status channel channel
Optical switch control
Auto_switch Auto_switch —
status
Note 1: This table only lists parameters that you should pay special attention to in the protection
switching test; other parameters, such as restore type and working mode, are
consistent with the protection configuration parameters.
2) Query the OCP card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning the protection
switching should be reported.
3. Trigger the OCP card switching at Station B in either of the two following ways:
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX1A interface on the OCP
card at Station A.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the Manual_Switch_to_Backup

or Force_Switch_to_Backup command in the control command window
of the OCP card at Station B.
3) Query the OCP card at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS→
OCP-Status, as shown in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
The protection uses
the OCP card’s
OUT1 and IN1
Line number OCP-1 OCP-1
interfaces, so the line
No. is shown as
OCP-1.
Channel Working
Working channel Protection channel —
Status
9-4 Version: B
(Continued)
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
Yes corresponds to
the switching by
Auto_Switch /
unplugging fiber; No
Optical switch control Manual_Switch_to_
Auto_switch corresponds to the
status Backup (Force_
switching by
Switch_to_Backup)
delivering the control
command.
4) Query the OCP card’s current alarm at Station B: the W_TO_P alarm
should be reported. The MANUAL_CONTROL (manual switching) alarm
should also be reported if the switching is triggered by delivering
command.
5) Check the service and the switching time with the test instrument 2. Make
sure the service is not interrupted and the switching time is less than 50ms.
6) Restore the test environment:
¡ By plugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the TX1A interface on

the OCP card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item for the OCP card is set to
Not_Resume, deliver the Manual_Switch_to_Main and
Clear_Switch_Type_Setting commands in sequence in the control
command window of the OCP card.
¡ By delivering the control command: deliver the

Clear_Switch_Type_Setting command to OCP-1 in the control
command window of the OCP card at Station B.
7) Query the OCP cards at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS
→OCP-Status, as shown in Table 9-1.
Version: B 9-5
9.2 Testing Optical channel 1+1 Route Protection
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the OCP cards in the
system can operate normally by testing the optical channel 1+1 route protection.
Tool / Instrument
In this protection mode, the OCP card is located between the OTU card and the
multiplexer / demultiplexer card (or optical add / drop multiplexer card). Suppose
that the service in the 21st channel corresponding to the OTU2S card between two
stations has been configured with the optical channel 1+1 route protection, and the
client service type is STM-64. See Figure 9-2 for the connection diagram for the test.
Figure 9-2 Optical Channel 1+1 Route Protection Schematic Diagram
9-6 Version: B
Prerequisites
u The optical channel 1+1 route protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For the OCP card, set the protection mode to line protection power
detection mode, the WTR time to 3 min, and the delay time to 0ms.
Procedures

testing procedures.
1) At Station A, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 1’s output and input
optical interfaces with the OTU2S card’s IN and OUT interfaces through
the fixed optical attenuator respectively.
2) At Station B, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 2’s output and input

2. Query channel status at Station A and Station B in normal conditions:
1) Query the OCP card: STATUS→OCP-status, as shown in Table 9-3.
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
The protection uses the OCP card’s
Line number OCP-1 OCP-1 OUT1 and IN1 interfaces, so the line No.
is shown as OCP-1.
Channel Working Working Working
—
Status channel channel
Version: B 9-7
(Continued)
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
Optical switch control Auto_
Auto_switch —
status switch
2) Query the OCP card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning the protection
3. Trigger the OCP card switching at Station B in either of the two following ways:
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX1A interface on the OCP
card at Station A.

or Force_Switch_to_Backup command in the control command window
of the OCP card at Station B.
3) Query the OCP card at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS→
OCP-Status, as shown in Table 9-4.
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
The protection uses the OCP
card’s OUT1 and IN1
Line number OCP-1 OCP-1
interfaces, so the line No. is
shown as OCP-1.
Channel Working Working
Protection channel —
Status channel
Yes corresponds to the
Auto_Switch /
switching by unplugging
Optical switch control Manual_Switch_to_
Auto_switch fiber; No corresponds to the
status Backup (Force_
switching by delivering the
Switch_to_Backup)
control command.
9-8 Version: B
4) Query the OCP card’s current alarm at Station B: the W_TO_P alarm
command.
¡ By plugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the TX1A interface on

the OCP card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item for the OCP card is set to
command window of the OCP card.

Clear_Switch_Type_Setting command to OCP-1 in the control
command window of the OCP card at Station B.
7) Query the OCP cards at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS
→OCP-Status, as shown in Table 9-3.
9.3 Testing 1 +1 Optical Multiplex Section

Protection Switching
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the OMSP cards in the
system can operate normally by testing the 1+1 optical multiplex section protection
switching.
Tool / Instrument
Version: B 9-9
Suppose that the 1 +1 optical multiplex section protection is configured for the
services between Stations A and B, and the test connection diagram is shown in
Figure 9-3. In the figure, the service in the first channel corresponding to the OTU2S
card between Station A and Station B is protected, and the client service type is
STM-64.
Figure 9-3 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Schematic Diagram
Prerequisites
u The 1+1 optical multiplex section protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For the OMSP card, set the WTR time to 3min, Delay time to 0ms.
Procedures
The following details the protection switching test procedures with an example. In
this example, protection switching in the Rx direction at Station B is tested.
9-10 Version: B

2. Query the channel status at Station A and Station B in normal conditions.
1) Query the OMSP card’s status: STATUS→OMSP-Status, as shown in

Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Line number OMS-1 OMS-1
Restore type Three minutes Three minutes
Optical switch working
Working Line Working line
status
Auto_switch Auto_switch
status
2) Query the OMSP card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning protection

3. Trigger the OMSP card switching at Station B in either of the two following
ways:
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the WTX interface on the OMSP
card at Station A.

or Force_Switch_to_Backup command in the Control Command
window of the OMSP card at Station B.
3) Query the OMSP cards' status after switching at Station A and Station B:
STATUS→OMSP-Status, as shown in Table 9-6.
Version: B 9-11
Table 9-6 1+1 Optical Multiplex Section Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
Restore type Three minutes Three minutes —
Optical switch
Working Line Protection line —
working status
Auto_Switch / Yes corresponds to the

Manual_Switch_ switching by unplugging
Auto_switch to_Backup (Force_ fiber; No corresponds to the
status
Switch_to_ switching by delivering the
Backup) control command.
4) Query the OMSP card’s current alarm at Station B: the W_TO_P alarm
command.
¡ By plugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the WTX interface on

the OMSP card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item for the OMSP card is set to
command window of the OMSP card.

Clear_Switch_Type_Setting command in the control command
window of the OMSP card at Station B.
7) Query the OMSP cards at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS
→OMSP-Status, as shown in Table 9-5.
9-12 Version: B
9.4 Testing Optical Line 1:1 Protection
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the OLP_1:1 cards in the
system can operate normally by testing the optical line 1:1 protection switching. The
OLP_1:1 card number is 2.159.066.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose that the 1:1 protection is configured for the optical line between Stations A
and B via the OLP_1:1 card, and the test connection diagram is shown in Figure 9-4.
In the figure, the service in the first channel corresponding to the OTU2S card
between Station A and Station B is protected, and the client service is STM-64.
Figure 9-4 Optical Line1:1 Protection Schematic Diagram
Prerequisites
u The optical line 1:1 protection has been properly configured.
Version: B 9-13
Note:
For the OLP card, set the WTR time to 3 min, Delay time to 0ms and
Protect mode to Unidirectional.
Procedures

testing procedures.

1) Query the OLP card: STATUS→OLP-status, as shown in Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 Optical line 1:1 Protection Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Protection Mode Receiving Auto switching (1:1 Auto switching (1:1
Direction unidirectional) unidirectional)
Protection mode in Tx Auto switching (1:1 Auto switching (1:1

direction unidirectional) unidirectional)
Optical switch working status

Working line Working line
in Rx direction
Transmitting Direction of
Optical Switch Working Working Line Working line
Status
switching test; other parameters, such as line number and restore type, are consistent
with the protection configuration parameters.
9-14 Version: B
2) Query the OLP card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning protection

3. Test the protection switching function: you can choose either method to trigger
the OLP card switching at Station B.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the MAIN-O interface on the OLP
card at Station A.

command to OTS_SEL_R in the control command window of the OLP
card at Station B.
3) Query the OLP card at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS→
OLP-Status, as shown in Table 9-8.
Table 9-8 Optical Line 1:1 Protection Test – Switching Status
Parameter Status Value

Remark
Station A Station B
Auto switching
(1:1 Yes corresponds to the switching
Auto switching
Protection Mode unidirectional) / by unplugging fiber; No
(1:1
Receiving Direction Manual_Switch corresponds to the switching by
unidirectional)
_to_Backup delivering the control command.
(single-end)
Auto switching Auto switching

Protection mode in
(1:1 (1:1 —
Tx direction
unidirectional) unidirectional)
Optical switch
working status in Rx Working line Protection line —
direction
Optical switch
working status in Tx Protection line Working line —
direction
4) Check the current alarms of the OLP cards at Station A and Station B.
Make sure that the W_TO_P alarms in the Tx and Rx directions at both
stations are reported respectively. Also the corresponding
Version: B 9-15
MANUAL_CONTROL alarms should be reported if triggered by delivering

control command.
¡ By plugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the MAIN-O interface

on the OLP card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item for the OLP cards at both stations is

set to Not_Resume,
u Deliver the Manual_Switch_to_Main and
Clear_Switch_Type_Setting commands in sequence to
OTS_SEL_T in the Control Command window of the OLP card at
Station A.
u Deliver the Manual_Switch_to_Main and

Clear_Switch_Type_Setting commands in sequence to
OTS_SEL_R in the Control Command window of the OLP card at
Station B.

Clear_Switch_Type_Setting command to OTS_SEL_R in the control
command window of the OLP card at Station B.
7) Query the OLP cards at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS
→OLP-Status, as shown in Table 9-7.
9.5 Testing Optical Line 1+1 Protection
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the OLP_1+1 cards in the
system can operate normally by testing the optical line 1+1 protection switching.
OLP_1+1 card number is 2.159.073.
9-16 Version: B
Tool / Instrument
Suppose that the 1+1 protection is configured for the optical line between Stations A
and B via the OLP_1+1 card, and the test connection diagram is shown in
Figure 9-5. In the figure, the service in the first channel corresponding to the OTU2S
card between Station A and Station B is protected, and the client service is STM-64.
Figure 9-5 Optical Line1+1 Protection Schematic Diagram
Prerequisites
u The optical line 1+1 protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For the OLP card, set the WTR time to 3 min, Delay time to 0ms and
Protect mode to Unidirectional.
Version: B 9-17
Procedures

testing procedures.

1) Query the OLP card: STATUS→OLP-status, as shown in Table 9-9.
Table 9-9 Optical Line 1+1 Protection Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Protection Mode Receiving (1:+1 unidirectional) Auto_ Auto switching (1+1
Direction Switch unidirectional)
Protection mode in Tx (1+1 unidirectional) 1+1 dual- (1+1 unidirectional) 1+1 dual-
direction fed fed
Optical switch working status
Working line Working line
in Rx direction
Transmitting Direction of
Optical Switch Working Working Line Working line
Status
2) Query the OLP card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning protection

the OLP card switching at Station B.
9-18 Version: B
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the MAIN-O interface on the OLP
card at Station A.

command to OTS_SEL_R in the control command window of the OLP
card at Station B.
3) Query the OLP card at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS→
OLP-Status, as shown in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Optical Line 1+1 Protection Test – Switching Status
Status Value
Parameter Remark
Station A Station B
Auto switching
(1+1 Yes corresponds to the switching
(1:+1
Protection Mode unidirectional) / by unplugging fiber; No
unidirectional)
Receiving Direction Manual_Switch corresponds to the switching by
Auto_Switch
_to_Backup delivering the control command.
(single-end)
(1+1 (1+1
Protection mode in
unidirectional) unidirectional) 1 —
Tx direction
1+1 dual-fed +1 dual-fed
Optical switch
working status in Rx Working line Protection line —
direction
Optical switch
working status in Tx Protection line Working line —
direction
4) Query the OLP card’s current alarm at Station B: the W_TO_P alarm
command.
Version: B 9-19
¡ By plugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the MAIN-O interface

on the OLP card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item for the OLP card is set to


Clear_Switch_Type_Setting command to OTS_SEL_R in the control
7) Query the OLP cards at Station A and Station B after switching: STATUS
→OLP-Status, as shown in Table 9-9.
9-20 Version: B
10 Testing the Network-level Protection
Functions at the Electrical Layer
The FONST 5000 provides multiple network-level protection modes at the electrical
layer. See Product Description for the principles of each protection mode. See
Configuration Guide for the configuration principles and configuration examples for
each protection mode.
Testing OCh 1+1 Protection Switching
Testing OCh m: n Protection Switching
Testing OCh Ring Protection Switching
Testing ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching
Testing ODUk m:n Protection Switching
Testing ODUk Ring Protection Switching
Version: B 10-1
10.1 Testing OCh 1+1 Protection Switching
Make sure that the working and protection channels and the cross-connect cards in
the system can operate normally by testing the ODUk 1+1 protection switching.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose the 17th channel between the two stations is used to extend four STM-64
services (each channel can load four STM-64 services), and the 18th channel is
used to provide the OCh 1+1 protection for the 17th channel.
Take the first STM-64 service between Station A and Station B as the test reference,
and the connection diagram for the test is shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 OCh 1+1 Protection Switching Test
Prerequisites
u The OCh 1+1 protection has been properly configured.
10-2 Version: B
10 Testing the Network-level Protection Functions at the Electrical Layer
Note:
For OCh 1+1 protection, set Return mode to Revertive, WTR time to 1
min, Protection mode to Unidirectional and Delay time to 0ms.
Procedures

testing procedures.
1) At Station A, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 1’s input and
output optical interfaces with the 4TA2 card’s "IN1" and "OUT1" interfaces
via the fixed optical attenuator respectively.
2) At Station B, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 2’s input and

1) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→OCh 1+1_Protect, as shown in

Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Och 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Working OCH alarm None None
Protection OCH alarm None None
Switching status Normal Normal
switching test; other parameters, such as working and protection slots, are consistent
2) Query the cross-connect card’s current alarm: no alarm concerning the

protection switching should be reported.
Version: B 10-3
the protection switching at Station B.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface on the working

LMS3E card at Station A.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the Manual-Switch or Force-

Switch command to the working LMS3E card slot in the control command
window of the MXCU card at Station B.
3) Check the cross-connect card status at Station A and Station B after

switching: STATUS→OCh 1+1_Protect, as shown in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Och 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Working OCH alarm None Yes / NoNote 2
Protection OCH
None None
alarm
Switching status Normal Switching
Note 2: Yes corresponds to the switching by unplugging fiber; No corresponds to the switching
by delivering the control command.
4) Query the cross-connect card’s current alarm at Station B: the working

LMS3E card slot should report the SWR alarm. The MANUAL_CONTROL
(manual switching) or LOCK_BAK (forced switching) alarms should also
be reported if the switching is triggered by delivering command.
5) Query the cross-connect card’s current alarm at Station A: no alarm

concerning protection switching should be reported.
¡ By unplugging fiber: restore the fiber connection at the TX interface on

the working LMS3E card at Station A.
10-4 Version: B
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item of the protection is set to
Not_Resume, then you also need to deliver the Protection_Lockout
and Clear commands to the working LMS3E in sequence in the control
command window of the MXCU card at Station B.
¡ By delivering control command: deliver the Clear command to the

working LMS3E card slot in the Control Command window of the
MXCU card at Station B.
8) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→OCh 1+1_Protect, as shown in

Table 10-1.
10.2 Testing OCh m: n Protection Switching
the system can operate normally by testing the OCh m:n protection switching.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose the 16th and 17th channels between the two stations of a project is used
to extend eight STM-64 services (each channel can load up to four STM-64
services), and the 18th channel is used to provide the OCh 1:2 protection for the
16th and 17th channels, in the unidirectional mode.
Take the first STM-64 service on the 16th and 17th channels between the two
stations as the testing reference, and the connection diagram for the test is shown in
Figure 10-2.
Version: B 10-5
Figure 10-2 OCh 1:2 Protection Switching Test
Prerequisites
u The OCh 1:2 protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For OCh 1:2 protection, set Return mode to Revertive, WTR time to 1
Procedures

testing procedures.
10-6 Version: B
1) At Station A, use pigtails to connect the output and input optical interfaces
on Instrument 1 with the first 4TA2 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the
on Instrument 3 with the first 8TS1 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the
3) At Station B, use pigtails to connect the output and input optical interfaces
on Instrument 4 with the second 4TA2 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via

1) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→OCh m:n_Protect, as shown in

Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Working OCH alarm (working
None None
OCH1)
Protection ODUk ID occupied

0 0
by working ODUk-1
Channel status of working

Normal Normal
OCH1
None None
OCH2)

0 0
by working OCH2

Normal Normal
OCH2
Version: B 10-7
Table 10-3 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Normal Status (Continued)
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Protection OCH alarm
None None
(protection OCH1)
2) Query the cross-connect cards' current alarm at Stations A and B: no

alarm concerning protection switching should be reported.
3. Test the protection switching function of the working ODUk-1: you can choose
either method to trigger the protection switching at Station B.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface of the LMS3E card
in the 19 slot at Station A.

Switch command to the working LMS2E card in the 19 slot in the control

switching: STATUS→OCh m:n_Protect, as shown in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
None None / YesNote 2
OCH1)
Protection ID occupied by
1 1
working OCH-1

Normal Switching
OCH1
None None
OCH2)

0 0
by working OCH2

Normal Normal
OCH2
10-8 Version: B
Table 10-4 OCh m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status (Continued)
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Protection OCH alarm
None None
(protection OCH1)
4) Query the cross-connect card’s current alarm at Station B: the SWR alarm
should be reported. The MANUAL_CONTROL (manual switching) or
LOCK_BAK (forced switching) alarms should also be reported if the
switching is triggered by delivering command.
5) Query the cross-connect card's current alarm at Station A: the 19 slot

should report the BRIDGE alarm.

the working LMS3E card in Slot 19 at Station A.
¡ By delivering control command: deliver the Clear command to the 19

slot in the control command window of the MXCU card at Station B.
8) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→OCh m:n_Protect, as shown in

Table 10-3.
4. Test the protection switching in working channel 2 with reference to the testing
procedures for working channel 1.
10.3 Testing OCh Ring Protection Switching
the system can operate normally by testing the OCh Ring protection switching.
Version: B 10-9
Tool / Instrument
Suppose a project consists of three FOADM stations (i. e. Stations A, B, and C)

forming a ring network. There are two STM-64 services between every two stations.
And the OCh Ring protection is configured for the services between every two
station.
and the connection diagram for the test is shown in Figure 10-3. This figure omits
the fiber connections between the LMS3E card and the multiplexer / demultiplexer
card, and between the multiplexer / demultiplexer card and the amplification card.
Figure 10-3 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test
Prerequisites
u The OCh Ring protection has been properly configured.
10-10 Version: B
Note:
Set the Delay time to 0ms for the OCh RIng protection.
Procedures
optical interfaces with the 4TA2 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the

1) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→OCh Ring_Protect, as shown in

Table 10-5.
Table 10-5 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B Station C
Group No. 1 1 1
West working OCH
None None None
alarm
West protection OCH
None None None
alarm
East working OCH
None None None
alarm
East protection OCH
None None None
alarm
West switching status Normal Normal Normal
East switching status Normal Normal Normal
Note 1: This table only lists parameters that you should pay special attention to the protection
switching test; other parameters, such as working ODUk slot, protection ODUk slot and
timeslot, are consistent with the protection configuration parameters.
Version: B 10-11
2) Query the cross-connect cards' current alarm at Stations A, B and C: no

3. Test the local end protection switching function: you can choose either method
to trigger the protection switching.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface on the east

working LMS3E card at Station A.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the local end Manual-Switch or

Force-Switch command to the west working LMS3E card slot in the
control command window of the MXCU card at Station B.
3) Check the channel status after local end switching: STATUS→OCh

Ring_Protect, as shown in Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test – Local End Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Group No. 1 1 1
West working OCH
None Yes / NoNote 2 None
alarm
West protection OCH
None None None
alarm
East working OCH
None None None
alarm
East protection OCH
None None None
alarm
West switching status Normal Local end switching Normal
East switching status Local end switching

Note 3 Normal Normal
Note 3: Bidirectional switching is implemented in this protection mode, i.e. switching on Rx at
the local and switching on Rx at the opposite end are implemented at the same time.
4) Query the cross-connect cards' current alarm at Station A and Station B:

the east working LMS3E slot at Station A and the west working LMS2E slot
at Station B should report the BRIDGE and SWR alarms. The
10-12 Version: B
MANUAL_CONTROL (manual switching) or LOCK_BAK (forced switching)

alarms should also be reported if the switching is triggered by delivering
command.
5) Check the service and the switching time with the test instrument 1 and 2.
Make sure the service is not interrupted and the switching time is less than
50ms.

the east working LMS3E card at Station A.

west working LMS3E in the control command window of the MXCU
card at Station B.

Table 10-5.
4. Test the far end protection switching function: you can choose either method to
trigger the protection switching.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface of the east

protection LMS3E card at Station A.
Note:
When testing the far end switching function by unplugging fibers, make
sure the laser on the TX interface on the east working LMS3E card or the
fiber on the TX interface on the east working LMS3E card at Station A is
unplugged.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the far end Manual-Switch or

Force-Switch command to the west working LMS3E card slot in the
control command window of the MXCU card at Station B.
3) Check the channel status after far end switching: STATUS→OCh

Ring_Protect, as shown in Table 10-7.
Version: B 10-13
Table 10-7 OCh Ring Protection Switching Test – Far End Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Group No. 1 1 1
West working OCH
alarm
West protection OCH
None Yes / No None
alarm
East working OCH
None None None
alarm
East protection OCH
None None None
alarm
West switching status Normal Far end switching Pass
East switching status Far end switchingNote 3 Pass Normal

the east working LMS3E slot at Station A and the west working LMS3E slot
at Station B should report the BRIDGE and SWR alarms. The
command.
50ms.

the east working and protection LMS3E cards at Station A.
10-14 Version: B
Note:
If the far end switching is triggered by shutting off the laser on the TX
interface on the east working LMS3E card at Station A, enable the
corresponding laser when restoring the test environment.
¡ By delivering control command: deliver the far end Clear command to

the west working LMS3E in the control command window of the

Table 10-5.
10.4 Testing ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching
the system can operate normally by testing the ODUk 1+1 protection switching.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose the 17th channel between two stations in a project is used to extend four
STM-64services (each channel can load up to four STM-64 services), and the
ODUK-1 timeslot of the 18th channel is used to provide the ODU1 1+1 protection for
the first STM-64 service on the 17th channel.
Take the first STM-64 service between the two stations as the test reference, and
the connection diagram for the test is shown in Figure 10-4.
Version: B 10-15
Figure 10-4 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test
Prerequisites
u The ODUk 1+1 protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For ODUk 1+1 protection, set Return mode to Revertive, WTR time to 1
Procedures

testing procedures.
1) At Station A, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 1’s input and
2) At Station B, use pigtails to connect the test instrument 2’s input and
10-16 Version: B

1) Right-click the corresponding cross-connect card, and select STATUS→

ODUk 1+1_Protect in the shortcut menu that appears. The status
information is shown in Table 10-8.
Table 10-8 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Working ODUK alarm None None
Protection ODUK alarm None None
Switching status Normal Normal

the protection switching at Station B.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface on the working

LMS3E card at Station A.

Switch command to the working ODUk in the control command window of
the MXCU card at Station B.

switching: STATUS→ODUk 1+1_Protect, as shown in Table 10-9.
Table 10-9 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Working ODUK alarm None Yes / NoNote 2
Protection ODUK alarm None None
Version: B 10-17
Table 10-9 ODUk 1+1 Protection Switching Test – Switching Status (Continued)
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Switching status Normal Switching

the working LMS3E card at Station A.
Note:
If the Restore_Waiting_Time item of the protection is set to
Not_Resume, then you also need to deliver the Protection_Lockout
and Clear commands to the working ODUk in sequence in the control

working ODUk channel in the Control Command window of the
7) Check the cross-connect card status: STATUS→ODUk 1+1_Protect, as

shown in Table 10-8.
10-18 Version: B
10.5 Testing ODUk m:n Protection Switching
the system can operate normally by testing the ODUk m:n protection switching.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose the 16th and 17th channels between two stations in a project are used to
extend eight STM-64 services (each channel can load up to four STM-64 services),
and the ODUK-1 timeslot of the 18th channel is used to provide the ODU1 1:2
protection for the first STM-64 services on the 16th and 17th channels.
Take the first STM-64 service on the 16th and 17th channels between the two
stations as the testing reference, and the connection diagram for the test is shown in
Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test
Version: B 10-19
Prerequisites
u The ODUk 1:2 protection has been properly configured.
Note:
For ODUk 1:2 protection, set Return mode to Revertive, WTR time to 1
Procedures

testing procedures.
on Instrument 3 with the first 8TS1 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via the
on Instrument 4 with the second 4TA2 card’s IN1 and OUT1 interfaces via

1) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→ODUk m:n_Protect, as shown

in Table 10-10.
10-20 Version: B
Table 10-10 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Alarm of working ODUk-1 None None
0x0 0x0
by working ODUk-1

Normal Normal
ODUk-1
0x0 0x0
by working ODUk-2

Normal Normal
ODUk-2
Alarm of protection ODUk-1 None None

3. Test the protection switching function of the working ODUk-1: you can choose
either method to trigger the protection switching at Station B.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface of the LMS3E card
in the 19 slot at Station A.

Switch command to the working ODUk-1 in Slot 19 via the control

switching: STATUS→ODUk m:n_Protect, as shown in Table 10-11.
Table 10-11 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
Group No. 1 1
Alarm of working ODUk-1 None Yes / NoNote 2
Version: B 10-21
Table 10-11 ODUk m:n Protection Switching Test – Switching Status (Continued)
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Station A Station B
0x1 0x1
by working ODUk-1

Normal Switching
ODUk-1
0x0 0x0
by working ODUk-2

Normal Normal
ODUk-2
Alarm of protection ODUk-1 None None
5) Query the cross-connect card's current alarm at Station A: the 19 slot

should report the BRIDGE alarm.

the working LMS3E card in Slot 19 at Station A.

working ODUk-1 channel in Slot 19 via the Control Command
window of the MXCU card at Station B.
8) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→ODUk m:n_Protect, as shown

in Table 10-10.
10-22 Version: B
4. Test the ODUk-2 protection switching with reference to the test procedures for
ODUk-1.
10.6 Testing ODUk Ring Protection Switching
the system can operate normally by testing the ODUk Ring protection switching.
Tool / Instrument
Suppose a project consists of three FOADM stations (i. e. Stations A, B, and C)

forming a ring network. There are two STM-64 services between every two stations.
And the ODUk Ring protection is configured for the first service between every two
station, in the unidirectional mode.
and the connection diagram for the test is shown in Figure 10-6. This figure omits
the fiber connections between the LMS3E card and the multiplexer / demultiplexer
card, and between the multiplexer / demultiplexer card and the amplification card.
Version: B 10-23
Figure 10-6 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test
Prerequisites
u The ODUk Ring protection has been properly configured.
Note:
Set the Delay time to 0ms for the ODUk RIng protection.
Procedures
10-24 Version: B

1) Query the cross-connect card: STATUS→ODUk Ring_Protect, as shown

in Table 10-12.
Table 10-12 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Normal Status
Status Value
Parameter
Group No. 1 1 1
West working ODUK
None None None
alarm
West protection
None None None
ODUK alarm
East working ODUK
None None None
alarm
East protection ODUK
None None None
alarm
West channel status Normal Normal Normal
East channel status Normal Normal Normal
2) Query the cross-connect cards' current alarm at Stations A, B and C: no

3. Test the local end protection switching function: you can choose either method
to trigger the protection switching.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface on the east

working LMS3E card at Station A.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the local end Manual-Switch or

Force-Switch command to the west working ODUk in the control
3) Check the channel status after local end switching: right-click the
corresponding cross-connect card at each station, and select STATUS→
ODUk Ring_Protect, as shown in Table 10-13.
Version: B 10-25
Table 10-13 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Local End Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Group No. 1 1 1
West working ODUK
alarm
West protection ODUK
None None None
alarm
East working ODUK
None None None
alarm
None None None
alarm
West switching status Normal Local end switching Normal
East switching status Local end switching

Note 3 Normal Normal

the east working ODUk slot at Station A and the west working ODUk slot at
Station B should report the BRIDGE and SWR alarms. The
command.
50ms.

the east working LMS3E card at Station A.

working ODUk channel in the control command window of the MXCU
card at Station B.
10-26 Version: B

in Table 10-12.
4. Test the far end protection switching function: you can choose either method to
trigger the protection switching.
1) By unplugging fiber: unplug the fiber at the TX interface of the east

protection LMS3E card at Station A.
Note:
When testing the far end switching function by unplugging fibers, make
sure the laser on the TX interface on the east working LMS3E card or the
fiber on the TX interface on the east working LMS3E card at Station A is
unplugged.
2) By delivering control command: deliver the far end Manual-Switch or

Force-Switch command to the west working ODUk in the control
3) Check the channel status after far end switching: right-click the
corresponding cross-connect card at each station, and select STATUS→
ODUk Ring_Protect, as shown in Table 10-14.
Table 10-14 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Far End Switching Status
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Group No. 1 1 1
West working ODUK
alarm
West protection
None Yes / No None
ODUK alarm
East working ODUK
None None None
alarm
None None None
alarm
West switching status Normal Far end switching Pass
Version: B 10-27
Table 10-14 ODUk Ring Protection Switching Test – Far End Switching Status (Continued)
Status Value
ParameterNote 1
Note
East switching status Far end switching
3 Normal Pass

the east working ODUk slot at Station A and the west working ODUk slot at
Station B should report the BRIDGE and SWR alarms. The
command.
50ms.

the east working and protection LMS3E cards at Station A.
Note:
If the far end switching is triggered by shutting off the laser on the TX
interface on the east working LMS3E card at Station A, enable the
corresponding laser when restoring the test environment.

west working ODUk channel in the control command window of the

in Table 10-12.
10-28 Version: B
11 Testing System APR Function
The APR (Automatic Power Reduction) function is also known as the eye protection
function. When optical fibers in a line section are broken, the system will shut off the
previous Tx amplifier card promptly, so as to prevent the laser with high optical
power on the broken end surface from injuring human body, especially human eyes.
When the fiber recovers, the system will restore the optical amplifier card to normal
work. For specific introduction to the APR function, refer to Product Description.
Note:
For card allocation rules and configuration methods for the APR function,
refer to Card Configuration Parameter Reference.
When the following two conditions are met simultaneously, the system will carry out
APR function and the lower the Tx optical power of the OA card automatically.
u The amplification card generates an LOS alarm.
u The OSC channel of the OSC card generates an LOS alarm.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, optical fiber jumper
The connection diagram for testing the APR function is illustrated in Figure 11-1.
Version: B 11-1
Figure 11-1 APR Function Testing Connection Diagram
Note:
u The EOSC card and the MSA card also support the APR function.
The EOSC card can replace the OSC card in the figure above, and
the MSA card is generally used in an OLA station.
u When the MSA card is used to amplify line signals at an OTM station
(end station), it can replace the “east Rx PA card + DCM card + west
Tx OA card” at station B in the figure above.
Prerequisites
The APR function has been properly configured.
Procedures
1. Make sure the system works normally; that is, make sure the Rx and Tx optical
power of each card is normal and the service is normal too.
2. Make sure the APR function is enabled for the OA cards at Stations A and B;
that is, the EYESAFE-Switch item is set to Auto in the control command
window of the OA card on the OTNM2000.
3. Query the OA card’s output optical power at Station A through the network
management system and make a record.
4. Unplug the fiber on the LINE-I interface of the OSCAD card at Station B.
11-2 Version: B
11 Testing System APR Function
5. Query the OA card at Station A on the network management system, and you
will find that the OA card reports the EYESAFE alarm. Also query the OA card’s
output optical power and the value should be less than -1 dBm.
6. Restore the fiber connection on the LINE-I interface of the OSCAD card at
Station B. Wait for a few seconds, and then query the OA card on the
OTNM2000; you will find that the EYESAFE alarm with the card is cleared. Also
query the OA card’s output optical power and make sure the optical power is
restored to the value recorded in Step 3.
7. Unplug the fiber on the IN interface of the OA card at Station B. Query Station A
on the OTNM2000 and the EYESAFE alarm will not be reported at the OA card.
8. Unplug the fiber on the WRX interface of the OSC card at Station B. Then
query Station A on the OTNM2000, and you will find the EYESAFE alarm is
reported at OA card and the output optical power is lower than -1dBm.
9. Restore the fiber connection on the OA card’s IN interface and the OSC card’s
WRX interface at Station B. Then query Station A on the OTNM2000 and you
will find that the EYESAFE alarm disappears from the OA card and the output
optical value is restored to the value recorded in Step 3.
10. Verify the OA card’s APR function at Station B according to the methods
described in Steps 3 to 9.
Version: B 11-3
12 Testing Remote Login Function
The FONST 5000 supports the remote login management function, i.e., when the
equipment is faulty, engineers from FiberHome technical support center will log in
the equipment remotely, perform fault diagnosis and fault location and thus improve
the troubleshooting efficiency.
Tool / Instrument
The OTNM2000, MODEM and PSTN line
The connection diagram for testing remote login is illustrated in Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Connection Diagram For The Remote Login Test
Prerequisites
The OTNM2000 can monitor the equipment normally.
Procedures
1. According to Figure 12-1, connect one end of the MODEM at the local network
management center to the serial port of the OTNM2000 server and the other
end to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).
2. Contact the FiberHome technical support center via telephone (Tel: +86 27
8769 1549), asking for a remote login function authentication.
Version: B 12-1
3. Provide the login information: telephone number of the PSTN line used by the
MODEM, user name and password of the network management computer as
well as login user name and password of the network management system.
4. Staff from the FiberHome technical support center will perform the remote login
test according to the above information and provide a feedback of test result.
4 If the test is successful, disconnect the MODEM from the computer and
keep the MODEM and the driver properly.
4 If the test is failed, check whether the information provided in step 3 is

correct; and check whether the MODEM connection and corresponding
PSTN line are unblocked. Eliminate the faults detected until the test
becomes successful.
12-2 Version: B
13 Finishing off
You need to do the finishing-off work after commissioning: backup network

management data, make labels and prepare project documents, so as to guarantee
the normal progress of maintenance at a later stage.
Backing up Network Management Data
Making Labels
Preparing Project Related Documents
Version: B 13-1
13.1 Backing up Network Management Data
You should backup the network management data, for fear that key configuration
data may be lost when a fault occurs with the network management system.
Tool / Instrument
OTNM2000
Prerequisites
The operator has the network management user right of an “advanced user” or
“intermediate user”.
Procedure
1. Double-click the icon on the desktop to open the devcfg window.
2. Click the Login button on the tool bar to bring up the User Login dialog box.
Enter the user name and password (both are 1) to log in.
3. Click the Read DB on the toolbar to read the configuration information from the
database to the devcfg window.
4. Select the Save as option from the File menu and the Save as dialog box
appears subsequently. In this dialog box, enter the destination directory and file
name of the saving operation and click the Save button.
13.2 Making Labels
For the convenience of on-site equipment installation and maintenance, installers

should use labels to mark various wires and cables related to this equipment. Use of
labels helps to install wires and cables in the cabinet orderly and correctly, and
facilitates inspection and maintenance of the equipment.
The labels are classified into cabinet labels and cable labels. The cable labels
include the power cable label, the optical fiber label and the alarm cable label, etc.
13-2 Version: B
13 Finishing off
The labels are available in different styles. The network operator can select the
labels of the same style for all the equipment in each equipment room.
Refer to Installation Guide for the manufacture method, specifications and

requirements for the labels.
13.3 Preparing Project Related Documents
After commissioning the project, project related design documents should be

updated with additional project information for convenience of future maintenance
and capacity expansion. Normally the following project documents should be
updated:
u Network diagram: According to the actual situation of the project, update the
connection diagram of the entire network, including station names, station
types, distances between stations and the actual attenuation.
u Network management connection diagram: Draw the connection diagrams at

each level, mark the manufacturer and type of the hub or the router used, and
mark the name of the network management host and the version of the network
management software.
u NE IP address and switch assignment table: According to the actual NE IP

address and switch allocation of the project, mark the corresponding IP
address and switch allocation of each station in the entire network diagram.
u Wavelength allocation diagram: According to the actual project situation,

update the wavelength allocation between stations in the project design
documents.
u Amplification card and DCM configuration diagram: According to the actual

project situation, update the amplification card and DCM configuration diagram
of each station in the project design documents.
u Fiber connection diagram: Update the fiber connection diagram of each station
in the project design documents according to the practical fiber connection.
u Optical attenuator statistics table: According to the actual situation of the project,
update the optical attenuator statistics tables of the stations in the project
design documents. Also record the number of attenuators used at each station
and the corresponding attenuation values, including the built-in VOA
attenuation values configured in the EMS.
Version: B 13-3
u Station power voltage and optical power table: Record the power voltage of
each station and the Rx and Tx optical power of each amplification card and
OTU card.
u Signal-to-noise ratio statistics table: Record the signal-to-noise ratios detected

by the amplification cards at each station and mark the channel power and
wavelength of each reference point.
13-4 Version: B
Appendix A DIP Switches of NE
Management Card
NE management cards include EMU, FCU, EFCU and EFCVU. The following
paragraphs introduce the DIP switch settings of each of them.
Note:
u The EMVU / EFCVU / FCVU card is applicable for the OTH subrack
of the FONST 5000.
u The EMU / EFCU / FCU card is applicable for the channel subrack of
the FONST 5000.
A.1 Instruction to DIP Switches on the EMU Card
To configure the NE IP address via DIP switches is to configure the IP address by

setting the status (OFF / ON) of the six 8-bit DIP switches on the EMU card. The
configuration is based on hardware and requires no assistant software. Therefore,
the configuration is convenient and not liable to cause fault.
In the EMU card, there are six 8-bit DIP switches: K1 to K6, as shown in Figure A-1.
Each switch has eight bits and each bit can be placed in the OFF or ON position.
Among them, K2 is reserved and others are used to set IP stack parameters for NEs.
Version: B A-1
Figure A -1 DIP Switches Inside the EMU Card
The five DIP switches for the configuration of NE IP address, i.e. K1 and K3 to K6,
are used as follows:
u Use of K1:
4 K1-1: keep the factory setting of this bit (set in the ON position) for the
EMU card (while the K1-1 bit for the FCU card should be set in the OFF
position).
4 K1-2: this bit is for setting the Ethernet port’s priority. According to the
OSPF protocol, among the NEs in the same subnet, including the router,
the Ethernet port’s PRI should be set to OFF for one and only one of the
NE's EMU card or router, and it should be set to ON for all the others.
4 K1-3: used for setting the way of configuring the NE’s IP address. OFF
means setting the IP address through DIP switches; in this way you should
set DIP switches K3 to K6. ON means setting the IP address by the LCT
downloading; in this way you should configure and download the IP
address through the LCT as well as set DIP switches K5 and K6.
4 K1-4: if both K1-4 and K1-1 are set to OFF, the card acts as an EFCU card;
if K1-4 is set to ON and K1-1 to OFF, the card acts as an FCU card.
4 K1-5 to K1-8: reserved.
A-2 Version: B
Appendix A DIP Switches of NE Management Card
u Use of K3 to K6: Switches K3 to K6 are used to set the NE’s IP address. The
K5 and K6 are used together to set this card’s physical address. When the bit
K1-3 is placed in the OFF position, the switches K3 to K6 should be set; when
the bit K1-3 is placed in the ON position, only the switches K5 and K6 need to
be set.
Corresponding relationship between switches K3 to K6 and the IP address’s each

byte: suppose the NE’s IP address is W. X. Y. Z. The values of W, X, Y and Z are
determined by switches K3, K4, K5 and K6. Each switch’s 1st bit is the most
significant bit and the 8th one is the least significant bit. When a switch bit is set to
ON, its corresponding IP address bit is 0; when the switch bit is set to OFF, its
corresponding IP address bit is 1. For example, if K3 is set to 00001010, K4 is set to
00010010, K5 is set to 00000010 and K6 is set to 00000001, the corresponding IP
address of the NE is 10.18.2.1.
Setting of switches K5 and K6 as physical address switches:
u while setting the NE’s attribute in the network management system, you should
set Switch 1 and Switch 2 in the NE attribute GUI according to the settings of
K5 and K6 respectively. For example, if K5 and K6 are set to 00001010 and
00001101, then Switch 1 and Switch 2 should be set to 0xA and 0xD
respectively.
u While delivering the IP address via the LCT, make sure that the EMU switch
(hexadecimal) settings in the Management Configuration window on the LCT
are consistent with the settings of K5 and K6 respectively. For example, if K5
and K6 are set to 00001010 and 00001101, then the EMU switch (hexadecimal)
should be set to 0a and 0d respectively.
Note:
If a subrack is configured with both active and standby EMU cards, the
DIP switch settings should be identical for the active and standby EMU
cards.
A.2 DIP Switches on the FCU Card
In the FCU card, there are six 8-bit DIP switches – K1 to K6. See below for the
setting of each switch:
Version: B A-3
u Set the K1_1 to OFF.
u Set the K1_4 to ON.
u You need not configure other switches.
Caution:
Do not set all the bits of K5 and K6 to ON at the same time; otherwise,
the FCU card will be reset repeatedly.
A.3 DIP Switches on the EFCU Card
There are six 8-bit DIP switches in the EFCU card – K1 to K6. The 1st and the 4th
bits of K1 should be set to OFF; and the other bits should be set in the same way as
those in the EMU card.
A.4 Instruction to DIP Switches on the EMVU

Card
The EMVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch–K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
A.5 DIP Switches on the FCVU Card
The FCVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch–K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
u Set the K1_1 to OFF.
A-4 Version: B
Appendix A DIP Switches of NE Management Card
A.6 DIP Switches on the EFCVU Card
The EFCVU card has a 4-bit DIP switch–K1. See below for the setting of the DIP
switch:
u K1_1 should be set to OFF.
u K1_4 should be set to OFF.
u It is unnecessary to set the other bits.
Version: B A-5
Appendix B Association between
GCC and Slot
Either GCC or OSC can be used to transfer monitoring information between NEs. If
both GCC and OSC exist between two NEs, the EMU card will automatically select
to use one of them. If the OSC does not exist, the equipment will select a GCC
randomly to transfer the monitoring information. Users can identify the GCC in use
via the GCC communication indicator LED on the EMU card panel.
See Table B-1 for the allocation of GCCs in the OTH subrack and the channel
subrack respectively.
Table B-1 GCC Allocation Table
Subrack Slot GCC Description
16 to 10 01 to 14
19 to 1F 15 to 28
06 to 00 29 to 42 Each slot is provided with two GCCs. For
09 to 1F 43 to 56 example, the Slot 16 corresponds to the 1st
OTH Subrack
36 to 30 57 to 70 and 2nd GCCs; the slot 2F corresponds to
39 to 1F 71 to 84 the 111th and 112th GCCs.
26 to 20 85 to 98
29 to 1F 99 to 112
07 to 01 29 to 42 Each slot is provided with two GCCs. For
Channel example, the Slot 07 corresponds to the
Subrack 08 to 0E 43 to 56 29th and 30th GCCs; the slot 0E
corresponds to the 55th and 56th GCCs.
Version: B B-1
Appendix C Application of the Card
Self-booting Function
With the card self-booting function, users need only to add the EMVU / EMU, FCVU
/ FCU and EFCVU / EFCU cards on the OTNM2000 and make sure that these cards
can be normally accessed via the EMS. The OTNM2000 can acquire the
information about the other cards in the equipment subrack automatically. In
practical project application for capacity expansion, the network management
system can also monitor the newly installed cards via the card self-booting function.
Tool / Instrument
OTNM2000
Prerequisites
The network management system can monitor the EMVU / EMU, FCVU / FCU and
EFCVU / EFCU cards normally.
Procedures
1. Add the EMVU / EMU card in the Devcfg GUI; then check and save the
configuration data.
If you have already created the project in the Devcfg GUI and need only to
expand capacity or replace a card, skip this step. Add the EMVU / EMU card,
verify and save the configuration data. Refer to Adding the Card, Validating
Configuration Data and Saving Configuration Data for operation procedures.
2. Log in the OTNM2000 GUI, wait for card self-booting, and confirm the card
information (In the following a certain card is used as an example to introduce
the card self-booting process).
1) Log in the OTNM2000 GUI, and you will find the self-booted card is grey
now and the alarm indicator LEDs 1 and 2 on the top of the card are red
and colored respectively.
Version: B C-1
2) Confirm adding a card: right-click the self-booted card, and select Add the
card or Replace the card from the shortcut menu that appears. Wait a few
seconds, the card will turn to blue, and the alarm indicator LEDs on the
card become green.
3. Deliver the equipment configuration data in the OTNM2000 GUI.
4 The configuration data of the self-booted card will not be written into the
database of the network management system automatically. To update the
database at the same time, you need to deliver the configuration data
manually.
4 Deliver the equipment configuration data: select Deliver Device-Cfg from

the shortcut menu of the corresponding NE. After the equipment
configuration data are successfully delivered, the colors of the alarm
indicator LEDs 1 and 2 on the self-booted card will correspond to the
current alarm of the card.
4. Read data from the database, set up NE connection, validate the configuration
data, and save the configuration data in the Devcfg GUI.
1) Read data from the database: click the Read DB button on the toolbar of
the Devcfg GUI.
2) Set up NE connection: if the self-booted card has both the OA card and the
PA card, you need to set up the NE connection. See Establishing NE
Connection for operation procedures.
3) Verify and save the configuration data. Refer to Validating Configuration

Data and Saving Configuration Data for operation procedures.
5. Relog in the OTNM2000 GUI, query the self-booting information, status, current
alarm and current performance of the card.
1) Log in the OTNM2000 GUI: relog in the OTNM2000 GUI according to the
procedures introduced in Logging into the OTNM2000.
2) Query the card self-booting information: click Query Card Self-booting

Information from the shortcut menu of the corresponding NE, and in the
Card-Management tab that appears, the information indicating whether
the card is present should be displayed as Yes.
3) Query the status, current alarm and current performance of the card: when
you query the status, current alarm and current performance of the
selfbooted card, corresponding data should be reported.
C-2 Version: B
Appendix D Common
Commissioning Parameter
8TDGF
Table D-1 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGF Card
Item Unit Specification
Optical module type - 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX

Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 10 40 80
Operating wavelength
nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean
dBm -3 0 5
launched power
Transmitter at
Minimum mean
reference point dBm -8 -5 -2
launched power
S
Minimum extinction
dB 9 9 9
ratio
Transmit signal eye
- IEEE802.3 mask compliant
pattern
Minimum sensitivity
Receiver at dBm -20 -23 -23
(BER ≤ 10-12)
reference point
Minimum overload
R dBm -3 -3 -3
(BER ≤ 10-12)
8TDGS
Table D-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card
Item Unit
155M-2.67G multi- 155M-2.67G multi- 155M-2.67G multi-
Optical module type - rate SFP optical rate SFP optical rate SFP optical
module module module
Version: B D-1
Table D-2 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TDGS Card (Continued)
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Source type - SLM / DFB SLM / DFB SLM / DFB

Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
Transmitter at suppression ratio
reference point Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
S launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
- ITU-T Rec. G.957 mask compliant
pattern
Receiver type - PIN APD

Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload
reference point dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
R
Maximum reflectance
of receiver, measured dB -27 -27 -27
at R
8TGX
Table D-3 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card
Item Unit
Transmitter at Operating wavelength

nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
reference range
point S Source type - SLM / DFB SLM / DFB SLM / DFB
D-2 Version: B
Appendix D Common Commissioning Parameter
Table D-3 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TGX Card (Continued)
Item Unit
Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern

Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload
reference dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
point R
Maximum reflectance
at R
8TA1
Table D-4 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range
Transmitter at Source type - SLM / DFB SLM / DFB SLM / DFB

reference point Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
S width
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
suppression ratio
Version: B D-3
Table D-4 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8TA1 Card (Continued)
Item Unit
Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern

Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload
(BER ≤ 10-12)
R
Maximum reflectance
at R
16TA
Table D-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range

Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
Transmitter at width
reference Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
point S suppression ratio
Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
D-4 Version: B
Table D-5 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card (Continued)
Item Unit
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern

Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload
reference dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
point R
Maximum reflectance
at R
Table D-6 FC400 Optical Interface Specifications of the 16TA Card
Item Unit
Target distance km 10
Operating wavelength range nm 1260 to 1335
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
Transmitter at
Maximum mean launched power dBm 2
reference
Minimum mean launched power dBm -5
point S
Extinction ratio dB 8.5 to 15
Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T Rec. G.957 mask compliant
Rx power indication accuracy dB ±2.0

-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -19
Receiver at Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0

reference Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
point R measured at R
Tx power indication accuracy dB ±1.5
Version: B D-5
2TA2
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
Optical module type - (multiple (multiple
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Maximum -20 dB width nm 1.0 0.4 0.4
Minimum side mode suppression
Transmitter at dB 30 - -
ratio
reference
Maximum mean launched power dBm -1 2 4
point S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -6 -1 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6.5 8.2 9
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -14 -17 -24

reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 0 -7
point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
4TA2
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
ratio
reference
point S
D-6 Version: B

-12
Receiver at Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -14 -17 -24
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
8TA2
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
ratio
reference
point S

reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) -12
dBm 0 0 -7
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
10TA2
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Optical module type -
(multiple rates) (multiple rates) (multiple rates)
Version: B D-7

ratio
reference
point S

-12
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
TA3
Table D-11 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the TA3 Card
Code applied - VRZ2000-3R2

Optical line code - NRZ
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 40
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35
reference ratio
point S Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
-12
Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3
reference
point R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at R
D-8 Version: B
ETA3
Table D-12 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the ETA3 Card
Optical module type - CS41-2D1

Target distance km 10
LANE0 nm 1264.5 to 1277.5
Operating
LANE1 nm 1284.5 to 1297.5
wavelength
LANE2 nm 1304.5 to 1317.5
range
LANE3 nm 1324.5 to 1337.5
Source type - SMF
dB 30
ratio
Transmitter at Maximum mean launched power

dBm 2.3
reference (each Lane)
point S Minimum mean launched power
dBm -7
(each Lane)

Transmit signal eye pattern - ITU-T Rec. G.959.1 mask compliant
-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -11.5
Receiver at Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3

reference Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
point R
dB -26
measured at R
TA4
Table D-13 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the TA4 Card
100GBASE-
Optical Interface Type - 100GBASE-LR4 4I1-9D1F 4I1-9C1F
ER4
Single channel signal ratio Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339
Multiplexing signal ratio Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736
Transmit- Central λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59

ter at wavelength λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09
nm
reference range of the λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63
point S transmitter λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19
Version: B D-9
Table D-13 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the TA4 Card (Continued)
Average
launched
dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -2.7 to +2.9 -2.5 to +2.9 -0.6 to +4.5
power of single
channel (OMA)
Single channel
eye pattern -
shape
X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3
0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4
Extinction ratio
of single
dB ≥4 ≥8 ≥4 ≥8
channel eye
pattern
Minimum
sensitivity of
Receiver the single dBm ≤-8.6 (OMA) ≤-20.9 (OMA) ≤ -10.5 ≤ -23.2
at channel
reference recerver
point R Minimum
overload of dBm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
single channel
TGX
Table D-14 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the TGX Card

D-10 Version: B
Table D-14 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the TGX Card (Continued)
nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean
dBm -3 0 5
launched power
Transmitter at
Minimum mean
reference dBm -8 -5 -2
launched power
point S
Minimum extinction
dB 9 9 9
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern
Minimum sensitivity
(BER ≤ 10-12)
reference
Minimum overload
point R dBm -3 -3 -3
(BER ≤ 10-12)
8EF
Table D-15 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range

Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Transmitter at Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
reference point suppression ratio
S Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Version: B D-11
Table D-15 Optical Interface Specifications of the 8EF Card (Continued)
Item Unit
Transmit signal eye
pattern

Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Minimum overload
(BER ≤ 10-12)
R
Maximum reflectance
at R
LMS2E
Table D-16 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the LMS2E Card
Optical source type and modulation mode - DFB / MZ

Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.3
Transmitter at
reference point
S
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm -17 (PIN)

Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 0 (PIN)
reference point
R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at R
2LMS2E
Table D-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card

D-12 Version: B
Table D-17 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LMS2E Card (Continued)

Transmitter at
reference point
S

Receiver at -12
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm 0 (PIN)
reference point
R Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB -27
measured at R
4LMS2E
Table D-18 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LMS2E Card
Optical source type and modulation

- DFB / MZ DFB / MZ
mode
800 (module whose 800 (module whose
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm
wavelength is tunable) wavelength is not tunable)
Maximum -20 dB
nm 0.3 0.3
width
Minimum side
mode suppression dB 30 30
ratio
Transmitter at Maximum mean

dBm 2 2
reference point launched power
S Minimum mean
dBm -3 -3
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 10 (the filter is disabled) 10 (the filter is disabled)
ratio
Transmit signal eye ITU-T Rec. G.691 mask ITU-T Rec. G.691 mask
-
pattern compliant compliant
Minimum sensitivity
Receiver at dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
reference point
Minimum overload
R dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Version: B D-13
Table D-18 Optical Interface Specifications of the 4LMS2E Card (Continued)
Maximum optical
dB 2 2
path penalty
Maximum
reflectance of
dB -27 -27
receiver, measured
at R
LMS3E (Double-slot)
Table D-19 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Channel spacing GHz 50 50 50

Optical line code ― NRZ-DPSK RZ-DQPSK P-DPSK
Maximum central frequency bias GHz ±2.5 ±2.5 ±2.5
Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA 0.7
Minimum side mode
Transmitter at dB 35 35 35
suppression ratio
reference point
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5
S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -5 -10 -5
Transmit signal eye pattern ― TBD TBD TBD
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA NA
Minimum sensitivity of the
dBm -14 -14 -14
receiverNote 1
Minimum overload of the
Receiver at dBm 0 0 0
receiver
reference point
Maximum reflectance of
R dB -27 -27 -27
receiver, measured at MPI-R
Receiving range of the
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
receiverNote 2
Note 1: An optical pre-amplifier is integrated in the receiver.
Note 2: The allowed wavelength range of the receiver should comply with the specifications above and be
corresponding to the Tx wavelength.
D-14 Version: B
Table D-20 Inner PA Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Double-slot)
Optical wavelength range (48

nm 1528 to 1568
channels in Band C)
Input power range dBm -30 to 0

Note1
Output optical power range dBm 0 to 10
Gain Note2 dB ≥25
Noise figure dB 5.5 / 7.5
Threshold for the Rx-LOS alarm dBm -25 to -24
Threshold for the Tx-LOS alarm dBm -3 to -2
Input power threshold at pump OFF dBm -25 to -24
Note 1: The optical output power includes the signal power and the ASE power. When the input
power is larger than -25 dBm, the 10dBm output power shall be guaranteed. In the
APC working mode, the optical power can be adjusted within the range via the
parameter setting.
Table D-21 Inner PA Specifications of the TDCM Card (Double-slot)
Wavelength range nm 1527 to 1565

Mean dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±20
Insertion loss dB 4
LMS3E (Single-slot)
Table D-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)
Channel spacing GHz 50 50

Optical line code ﹣ NRZ-DPSK RZ-DQPSK
Maximum central frequency bias GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA
Transmitter at dB 35 35
ratio
reference
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
point S
Minimum mean launched power dBm -5 -10
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA NA
Transmit signal eye pattern ﹣ TBD TBD
Version: B D-15
Table D-22 Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot) (Continued)
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver

Note 1 dBm -14 -14
Minimum overload point of the

Receiver at dBm 0 0
receiver
reference
point R dB -27 -27
measured at R
Receiving range of the receiver Note nm
2 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568

Table D-23 Inner PA Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)

nm 1528 to 1568
channels in Band C)

Note1
Gain dB ≥25
power is larger than -20 dBm, such an output power range shall be guaranteed. In the
parameter setting.
Table D-24 Inner TDCM Specifications of the LMS3E Card (Single-slot)

Insertion loss dB 4
D-16 Version: B
LMS4E
Table D-25 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the LMS4E Card
Channel spacing GHz 50

Optical line code ―― Coherent PM-QPSK
Transmission rate Gbit/s 127.156
Nominal center frequency range THz 191.3 to 196.05
Maximum central frequency bias GHz ±2.5
Transmitter at Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35

reference point Maximum mean launched power dBm 5
S Minimum mean launched power dBm -5
Minimum dispersion tolerance ps/nm ≥55000
Minimum differential group delay
ps ≥105 (0.5dB OSNR penalty)
tolerance value
Minimum sensitivity of the receiver dBm ≤ -18
Receiver at Minimum overload of the receiver dBm ≥0

reference point Maximum reflectance of receiver,
dB ≤ -27
R measured at MPI-R
Receiving range of the receiverNote 1 nm 1529.16 to 1567.14
2LA2
Table D-26 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card

- DFB / MZ DFB / MZ
mode
Maximum -20 dB
nm 0.3 0.3
width
Transmitter at Minimum side
reference point mode suppression dB 30 30
S ratio
Maximum mean
dBm 2 2
launched power
Version: B D-17
Table D-26 Optical Interface Specifications of the 2LA2 Card (Continued)
Minimum mean
dBm -3 -3
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
-
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Maximum optical
reference point dB 2 2
path penalty
R
Maximum
reflectance of
dB -27 -27
receiver, measured
at R
4LA2

- DFB / MZ DFB / MZ
mode
Maximum -20 dB
nm 0.3 0.3
width
Minimum side
ratio

dBm 2 2
S Minimum mean
dBm -3 -3
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
-
D-18 Version: B
Minimum sensitivity
dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Minimum overload
dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Receiver at
Maximum optical
reference point dB 2 2
path penalty
R
Maximum
reflectance of
dB -27 -27
receiver, measured
at R
8LA2

- DFB / MZ DFB / MZ
mode
Maximum -20 dB
nm 0.3 0.3
width
Minimum side
ratio

dBm 2 2
S Minimum mean
dBm -3 -3
launched power
Minimum extinction
ratio
-
Minimum sensitivity
Receiver at dBm -17 (PIN) -17 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
reference point
Minimum overload
R dBm 0 (PIN) 0 (PIN)
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Version: B D-19
Maximum optical
dB 2 2
path penalty
Maximum
reflectance of
dB -27 -27
receiver, measured
at R
MST2
Table D-29 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-16 / OTU1
Service)
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range

Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
reference Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
point S launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern

Receiver at Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
reference (BER ≤ 10-12)
point R Minimum overload
dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
D-20 Version: B
Table D-29 Specifications of Client Side Interfaces on the MST2 Card (the STM-16 / OTU1
Service) (Continued)
Item Unit
Maximum reflectance
at R
Table D-30 Client Side Interface Specifications of the MST2 Card (the 10GE Service)

nm 1270 to 1355 1275 to 1350 1500 to 1580
range
Maximum mean
dBm -3 0 5
launched power
Transmitter at
Minimum mean
reference dBm -8 -5 -2
launched power
point S
Minimum extinction
dB 9 9 9
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern
Minimum sensitivity
(BER ≤ 10-12)
reference
Minimum overload
point R dBm -3 -3 -3
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Table D-31 Specifications of Wavelength Division Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card

Transmitter at
reference
point S
Version: B D-21
Table D-31 Specifications of Wavelength Division Optical Interfaces on the MST2 Card
(Continued)

-12
Minimum sensitivity (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -17 (PIN)
Receiver at
reference
dB -27
measured at R
OTU2S
Table D-32 Client Side Interface Specifications of the OTU2S Card
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
ratio
reference
point S

-12
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
Table D-33 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2S Card

Transmitter at Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.3

reference Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
D-22 Version: B
(Continued)

-12
Receiver at
reference
dB -27
measured at R
OTU2E
Table D-34 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2E Card
Item Unit
nm 1260 to 1335 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
range

Maximum -20 dB
nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side mode
dB 30 30 30
reference Maximum mean
dBm 0 3 3
point S launched power
Minimum mean
dBm -5 -2 -2
launched power
Minimum extinction
dB 8.2 8.2 8.2
ratio
Transmit signal eye
pattern
Receiver at Receiver type - PIN APD

reference Minimum sensitivity
dBm -18 -27 -28
point R (BER ≤ 10-12)
Version: B D-23
Table D-34 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2E Card (Continued)
Item Unit
Minimum overload
dBm 0 -9 -9
(BER ≤ 10-12)
Maximum reflectance
at R
Table D-35 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2E Card

Transmitter at
reference
point S

Receiver at
reference
dB -27
measured at R
OTU2F
Table D-36 Wavelength Division Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU2F Card

Transmitter at
reference
point S
D-24 Version: B
(Continued)

-12
Receiver at
reference
dB -27
measured at R
OTU3S
Table D-37 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU3S Card

Code applied - VRZ2000-3R2
Fiber type - G.652
Transmitter at Maximum -20 dB width nm -

reference Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
-12
Receiver at
Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10-12) dBm 3
reference
Maximum optical path penalty dB 2
point R
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R dB -27

Optical line code ― RZ-DQPSK NRZ-DPSK
Maximum central frequency
GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Transmitter at bias
reference Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA
point S Minimum side mode
dB 35 35
suppression ratio
Version: B D-25
(Continued)
Maximum mean launched

dBm 5 5
power
Minimum mean launched

dBm -10 -5
power
Transmit signal eye pattern ― TBD TBD

dBm -14 -14
receiver Note 1
Receiver at dBm 0 0
receiver
reference
Maximum reflectance of
point R dB -27 -27
receiver, measured at MPI-R
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
receiver Note 2
Table D-39 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3S Card

Output optical power range Note1 dBm 0 to 10
Note2
Gain dB ≥25
Noise figure - 5.5 / 7.5
parameter setting.
Note 2: For the signal optical power gain, the larger the gain the better with the guaranteed
minimum 20dB.
D-26 Version: B
Table D-40 Specifications for the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3S Card

Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3E
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
ratio
reference
point S

dBm 0 0 -7
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R

Optical line code - RZ-DQPSK P-DPSK
Maximum central frequency bias GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Transmitter at Maximum -20 dB width nm NA 0.7
reference Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35 35
point S ratio
Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5
Version: B D-27
(Continued)
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10 -5

Transmit signal eye pattern - TBD TBD
dBm -14 -14
receiver Note 1
Receiver at dBm 0 0
receiver
reference
dB -27 -27
measured at MPI-R
Receiving range of the receiver nm
Note 2 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568

Table D-43 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3E Card

nm 1528 to 1568
channels in Band C)

Note1
Gain Note2 dB ≥25
parameter setting.
minimum 20dB.
D-28 Version: B
Table D-44 Specifications for the Built-in TDCM of the OTU3E Card

Insertion loss dB 4
OTU3F

Optical line code - RZ-DQPSK NRZ-DPSK
Maximum central
GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
frequency bias
Maximum -20 dB width nm NA NA

Minimum side mode
dB 35 35
suppression ratio
Transmitter at
Maximum mean launched
reference dBm 5 5
power
point S
Minimum mean launched
dBm -10 -5
power
Transmit signal eye

- TBD TBD
pattern

dBm -14 -14
receiver Note 1
dBm 0 0
Receiver at receiver
reference Maximum reflectance of
point R receiver, measured at dB -27 -27
MPI-R
nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
receiver Note 2
Version: B D-29
Table D-46 Specifications for the Built-in PA of the OTU3F Card

Output optical power range
Note1 dBm 0 to 10
Gain Note2 dB ≥25

Threshold for the Rx-LOS
dBm -25 to -24
alarm
Threshold for the Tx-LOS
dBm -3 to -2
alarm
Input power threshold at pump
dBm -25 to -24
OFF
parameter setting.
minimum 20dB.
OTU4S
Table D-47 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU3S Card
100GBASE-
Optical Interface Type - 100GBASE-LR4 4I1-9D1F 4I1-9C1F
ER4
Single channel signal ratio Gbit/s 25.78125 27.95249339
Multiplexing signal ratio Gbit/s 103.125 111.8099736
Central λ1 1294.53 to 1296.59

wavelength λ2 1299.02 to 1301.09
nm
range of the λ3 1303.54 to 1305.63
Transmitter
transmitter λ4 1308.09 to 1310.19
at reference
point S Average
launched
dBm -2.5 to +2.9 -2.7 to +2.9 -2.5 to +2.9 -0.6 to +4.5
power of single
channel (OMA)
D-30 Version: B
Table D-47 Client Side Optical Interface Specifications of the OTU3S Card (Continued)
Single channel
eye pattern -
shape
X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 Y3
0.25 0.4 0.45 0.25 0.28 0.4
Extinction ratio
of single
dB ≥4 ≥8 ≥4 ≥8
channel eye
pattern
Minimum
sensitivity of
the single dBm ≤-8.6 (OMA) ≤-20.9 (OMA) ≤ -10.5 ≤ -23.2
Receiver at
channel
reference
recerver
point R
Minimum
overload of dBm 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
single channel

Optical line code - Coherent PM-QPSK
Transmitter at
reference
point S
Version: B D-31
(Continued)

tolerance value
dB ≤ -27
point R measured at MPI-R
OTU4E
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
(multiple rates)
rates) rates)
ratio
reference
point S

dBm 0 0 -7
point R
dB -27 -27 -27
measured at R
D-32 Version: B

Transmitter at dB 35
ratio
reference
point S
ps ≥100
tolerance value
dB ≤ -27
OTU4F

Transmitter at Maximum -20 dB width nm 0.5
reference Minimum side mode suppression
dB 35
point S ratio
Version: B D-33
(Continued)

tolerance value
dB ≤ -27
OA
Table D-52 Specification of the OA Card
Item Unit Specification Remark

Wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 -
Saturated output power dBm 21 24 -
18, 20, 23, 25, 27, 18, 20, 23, 25,
Target gain dB -
30, 33 27, 30, 33
Flatness dB ≤ 1.5 25°C
Noise figure dB ≤ 5.5
-
DGV dB/dB ≤3
APR output power dBm -1±0.5 -
Output power without input dBm 6±0.5 -
Input power monitoring range dBm -25 to 3
Output power monitoring range dBm -10 to 22
Split ratio at the output power
- 1% 0.5%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least -
2 waves with output power ≥ 7 dB ≤3

dBm)
Nominal gain error range dB ±0.5

Error range of output saturated
dB 0.5
optical power
D-34 Version: B
Table D-52 Specification of the OA Card (Continued)

EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
PA
Table D-53 Specification of the PA Card

Wavelength range nm 1528 to 1568 -
Saturated output power dBm 14 13 -
10, 14, 17,
Target gain dB 25 -
20
Flatness dB ≤1 25°C
Valid noise figure dB ≤ 5.5
-
DGV dB/dB ≤3
APR output power dBm -1±0.5 -
Output power without input dBm -16 to -12 -
Input power monitoring range dBm -33 to 0
Output power monitoring range dBm -15 to 15
- 1%
monitoring port
Power monitoring accuracy dB ±0.5

Optical power overshoot (at least 2 -
dB ≤3
waves with output power ≥ 7 dBm)

Error range of output saturated
dB 0.5
optical power
EVOA attenuation range dBm 1 to 25
HOA
Table D-54 Specification of the HOA Card

Input optical power range dBm -20 to 2
Saturated output power dBm 27
Target gain dB 24
Version: B D-35
Table D-54 Specification of the HOA Card (Continued)
Maximum noise figure dB ≤6

Dynamic gain tilt (DGT) dB/dB ≤3
Gain tilt dB 0
Polarization dependent gain (DG) dB ≤ 0.3
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps ≤ 0.5
Pump leakage at the output end dBm ≤ -30
Pump leakage at the input end dBm ≤ -30
Output power at pump OFF report dBm ≤ -45
Optical input return loss (with EDFA shut down) dB ≥40
Optical output return loss (with EDFA shut down) dB ≥40
APR output power dB 8
Output power without input signal dBm 6
Error range of output saturated optical power dB 0.5
Split ratio at the output power monitoring port - 0.5%
3dB adding and dropping
us 300
path
Set up time of gain 9dB adding and dropping

us 500
locking path
15dB adding and

us 1000
dropping path

dB 0.7
path
Transient gain
overshoot and dB 0.9
path
undershoot
15dB adding and
dB 1.5
dropping path
Transient gain deviation dB 1
D-36 Version: B
RAU
Table D-55 Specifications of the RAU Card

nm 1528 to 1568 -
channels in Band C)
Flatness dB ≤2 The G.652 optical fiber
Pump wavelengths number - ≤4 -

Distributed typical gain dB 12 The G.652 optical fiber
Valid noise figure dB ≤0

Pump optical power mW 600
Polarization dependent gain dB 0.2
PMD - 0.2 -
Insert loss dB ≤1
- 2.5%
monitoring port
ROA
Table D-56 Specification of the ROA Card
Optical wavelength range (48 channels in

nm 1528 to 1562
Band C)
Pump light range nm 1468 to 1495

Return loss dB ≥45
Insertion loss (the pump light is disabled) dB ≤1
Pump light isolation (the pump light is
dB ≤ 0.3
disabled)
PMD ps ≤ 0.3
Total pump light output power mW ≥1000
Pump wavelengths number - ≥2
Pump number / per wavelength - 1 or 2
Version: B D-37
MSA
Table D-57 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturated Output is 21dBm)
Item Unit VGA-16/21-8-21 VGA-20/25-9-21 VGA-24/29-10-21 VGA-28/33-11-21

Optical
wavelength
range (48 nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
channels in Band
C)
Gain flatness dB <1 <1 <1 <1

Noise figure dB ≤ 9.1 ≤ 7.2 ≤6 ≤ 5.4
DGV dB/dB ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5
APR output
dBm -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5
power
Output power
dBm +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5
without input
Input power
dBm -32 to 5 -32 to 1 -32 to -3 -32 to -7
monitoring range
Output power
dBm -16 to 21 -12 to 21 -8 to 21 -4 to 21
monitoring range
Split ratio at the

output power - 1% 1% 1% 1%
monitoring port
Power
monitoring dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
accuracy
Optical power
overshoot (at
least 2 waves dB ≤3 ≤3 ≤3 ≤3
with output
power ≥ 7 dBm)
Nominal gain
dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
error range
Error range of
output saturated dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
optical power
D-38 Version: B
Table D-58 Specifications of the MSA Card (Saturated Output is 24dBm)
Item Unit VGA-16/21-8-24 VGA-20/25-9-24 VGA-24/29-10-24 VGA-28/33-11-24

Optical
wavelength
range (48 nm 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568 1528 to 1568
channels in the
C-band)
Gain flatness dB <1 <1 <1 <1

Noise figure dB ≤ 9.1 ≤ 7.2 ≤6 ≤ 5.4
DGV dB/dB ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5 ≤ 2.5
APR output
dBm -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5 -1±0.5
power
Output power
dBm +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5 +6±0.5
without input
Input power
dBm -32 to 8 -32 to 4 -32 to 0 -32 to -4
monitoring range
Output power
dBm -16 to 24 -12 to 24 -8 to 24 -4 to 24
monitoring range
Split ratio at the

output power - 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%
monitoring port
Power
monitoring dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
accuracy
Optical power
overshoot (at
least 2 waves dB ≤3 ≤3 ≤3 ≤3
with output
power ≥ 7 dBm)
Nominal gain
dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
error range
Error range of
output saturated dB ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
optical power
Version: B D-39
OCP
Table D-59 Specifications of the OCP Card

IN→TXA, IN→TXB dB ≤ 4.5 Line 1, line 2
Insert loss RXA→OUT,
dB ≤ 1.5 Line 1, line 2
RXB→OUT
Optical power
RXA / RXB dBm -30 to 20 Line 1, line 2
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1 -
Protection switching time ms ≤ 30 -
OMSP
Table D-60 Specifications of the OMSP Card
IN→WTX
dB ≤ 4.5
IN→PTX
Insert loss
WRX→OUT
dB ≤ 1.5
PRX→OUT
Optical power
WRX / PRX dBm -30 to 20
monitoring range
Optical power detection accuracy dBm ≤1

Protection switching time ms ≤ 30
OLP_1+1
Table D-61 Specifications of the OLP_1+1 Card
OSC interface nm 1510 ± 5

LINE interface nm Standard wavelength of C-band
Operating 1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of
MAIN interface nm
wavelength C-band
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength of
PROT interface nm
C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
Insert loss OSC_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB ≤ 2.5
D-40 Version: B
Table D-61 Specifications of the OLP_1+1 Card (Continued)
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (the signal
wavelength is 1510 dB ≥15
nm)
Isolation
OSC-O (the signal
wavelength is 1550 dB ≥30
nm)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring range dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
OLP_1:1
Table D-62 Specifications of the OLP_1:1 Card
OSC interface nm 1510 ± 5

Standard wavelength of
LINE interface nm
C-band
Operating
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
wavelength MAIN interface nm
of C-band
1510 ± 5 or 1510 + wavelength
PROT interface nm
of C-band
OSC_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 5.5
OSC_I→PROT_O dB
MAIN_I→LINE_O dB
Insert loss ≤ 2.5
PROT_I→LINE_O dB
LINE_I→MAIN_O dB
≤ 2.5
LINE_I→PROT_O dB
Version: B D-41
Table D-62 Specifications of the OLP_1:1 Card (Continued)
MAIN_I→OSC_O dB
≤ 5.5
PROT_I→OSC_O dB
LINE-O (the signal
dB ≥15
wavelength is 1510 nm)
Isolation
OSC-O (the signal
dB ≥30
wavelength is 1550 nm)
PROT_I dBm -42 to -10

Input optical
MAIN-I (1510 nm) dBm -42 to -10
power range
MAIN-I (1550 nm) dBm -40 to 10
Optical power monitoring range dBm ±1
Switching time ms ≤ 50
OSC
Table D-63 Specifications of the Optical Interfaces on the OSC Card
Item Specification Remark

Line rate 25.344Mbit/s
-
Code 2B1H
Transmitting optical The value is higher than 2 dBm for a
-7 to -2 dBm
power long span module
The value is -48 dBm for a long span

Receiver sensitivity -45 dBm
module.
The value is -8 dBm for a long span
Input overload point -3 dBm
module.
-20dB spectrum width 0.5nm
Side mode suppression -
> 30 dB
ratio
1510nm±5nm (normal The value should be 1510nm±10nm
temperature) at high temperature (50℃).
Table D-64 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kbit/s)
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2048 kbit/s

Bit rate accuracy ±50ppm (±102.4bit/s)
Code HDB3
D-42 Version: B
Table D-64 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kbit/s) (Continued)
Item Specification
Pulse shape Rectangular, ITU-T Rec. G.703 mask compliant
Pair(s) in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75 Ω 120 Ω

Nominal peak voltage of a mark
2.37V 3V
(pulse)
Peak voltage of a space (no pulse) 0 ± 0.237 V 0 ± 0.3V

Nominal pulse width 244 ns
Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and
negative pulses at the centre of the 0.95 to 1.05
pulse interval
Ratio of the widths of positive and

negative pulses at the nominal half 0.95 to 1.05
amplitude
Maximum peak-to-peak jitter at an

Comply with ITU-T Rec. G.823
output port
Within the following ranges:

Return loss at the output port (dB) (51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 6 dB
(102kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 8 dB
Within the following ranges:

(51 kHz to 102 kHz) ≥ 12 dB
Return loss at the input port (dB)
(102kHz to 2048kHz) ≥ 18 dB
(2048kHz to 3072kHz) ≥ 14 dB
Attenuation of the input port 0 to 6 dB (1024 kHz)
Jitter tolerance of the input port Comply with ITU-T Rec. G.823
Table D-65 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kHz)
Item Specification
Pulse shape Rectangular, conforming with ITU-T Rec. G.703 mask
Pair type Coaxial pair Symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75Ω resistive 12Ω resistive

Maximum peak voltage (Vop) 1.5 1.9
Minimum peak voltage (Vop) 0.75 1.0
≤0.05 UIp-p (the tested frequency range is from
Output jitter
f1=20Hz to f4=100kHz) (G.813)
Version: B D-43
Table D-65 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the OSC Card (2048kHz) (Continued)
Item Specification
Attenuates 0 to 6dB according to the rule at 2048kHz

Attenuation of the input port
Return loss ≥ 15 dB (at the frequency of 2048 kHz)
EOSC
Table D-66 E1 Electrical Interface Specifications of the EOSC Card (2048kHz)
Item Specification
Pulse shape Rectangular, conforming with ITU-T Rec. G.703 mask
Pair type Coaxial pair Symmetrical pair
Test load impedance 75Ω resistive 12Ω resistive

Maximum peak voltage (Vop) 1.5 1.9
Minimum peak voltage (Vop) 0.75 1.0
≤0.05 UIp-p (the tested frequency range is from
Output jitter
f1=20Hz to f4=100kHz) (G.813)
Attenuates 0 to 6dB according to the rule at 2048kHz

Attenuation of the input port
Return loss ≥ 15 dB (at the frequency of 2048 kHz)
Table D-67 Specifications of the GE Optical Interface of the EOSC Card
1000BASE- 1000BASE-
Optical module type - 1000BASE-LX
SX ZX
1270 to
Operating wavelength range nm 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Transmitter at 1355
reference Maximum mean launched power dBm -3 0 5

point S Minimum mean launched power dBm -11.5 -4.5 -2
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9.0 9.0 9.0

-12
reference Minimum overload (BER ≤ 10 ) dBm -3 -3 -3
point R Transmit signal eye pattern - IEEE Rec. 802.3z mask compliant
D-44 Version: B
Other interface specifications of the EOSC card are consistent with those of the
OSC card.
OPM4 / OPM8
Table D-68 Specifications of the OPM4 / OPM8 Card
Supervisory channels number - 96

Center wavelength detection accuracy dBm ±0.05
Optical power measurement accuracy dBm ±0.5
Dynamic range of the signal-to-noise ratio dB 10 to 25
Signal-to-noise ratio detection accuracy dB ±1.5
Supervisory optical interfaces number - 4/8
DCM
Table D-69 G.652 Optical Fiber - DCM Parameters
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza- Polariza- Operating
Optical Compensa- Maximum Input
Slope tion Mode tion Wave-
Module tion Insertion Power
Compensa- Dispersion Dependent length
Type Distance Loss (dB) Allowed
tion Rate (ps) Loss (dB) Range (nm)
(km) (dBm)
1 20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20

2 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
3 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20 1528 to
90% to 110%
4 80 8 0.7 0.1 20 1568
5 100 9 0.8 0.1 20
6 120 9.8 0.3 0.1 20
Table D-70 G.655 Optical Fiber - DCM Specifications
Typical Maximum
Dispersion Polariza- Polariza-
Optical Compensa- Maximum Input Operating
Slope tion Mode tion
Module tion Insertion Power Wavelength
Compensa- Dispersion Dependent
Type Distance Loss (dB) Allowed Range (nm)
tion Rate (ps) Loss (dB)
(km) (dBm)
1 40 5 0.5 0.3 24
90% to 1528 to
2 80 8 0.7 0.3 24
110% 1568
3 120 9.8 0.9 0.3 24
Version: B D-45
Appendix E Abbreviation
3R Reamplifying, Reshaping and Retiming
ADM Add / Drop Multiplexer
APR Automatic Power Reduction

APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BER Bit Error Ratio

BMU Board Management Unit
BoD Bandwidth on Demand

CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture
DCC Data Communication Channel

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMS Element Management System
EOS Ethernet over SDH

ESCON Enterprise System Connection Architecture
European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI
Institute
FC Fiber Channel
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber-Channel Connection
FOADM Fixed Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer
GCC General Communication Channel

GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of Order 3
IP Internet Protocol
Version: B E-1
International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication

ITU-T
Standardization Sector
L Long-haul
LCT Local Craft Terminal

LMP Link Management Protocol
LSP Label Switch Path

NE Network Element
NNI Network Node Interface
O/E/O Optical / Electrical / Optical Conversion
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add / Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OCh Optical Channel
OCP Optical Channel Protection
ODU Optical Demultiplexer Unit
ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OMU Optical Multiplexer Unit
OPA Optical Pre-amplifier
OPM Optical Channel Performance Monitor
OPUk Optical Channel Payload Unit-k
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
OTH Optical Transmission Hierarchy
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTM Optical Transport Module
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTU Optical Channel Transport Unit
OVPN Optical Virtual Private Network
PC Permanent Connection
PDP Power Distribution Panel
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
QoS Quality of Service
E-2 Version: B
Appendix E Abbreviation
ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering
Rx Receiver
S Short-haul
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Switched Connection
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

SPC Soft Permanent Connection
SRLG Shared Risk Link Group
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-n Synchronous Transport Module-Level n (n=1, 4, 16, 64, 256)
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TE Traffic Engineering
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WSS Wavelength Selective Switching
Version: B E-3
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survery
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company
To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.
Documentation Name
Code and Version
Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?
8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?
9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?
□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)
10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:
Satisfied (please specify)
Unsatisfied (please specify)
12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:
Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com.cn

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment Commissioning Guide (Version B)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment Commissioning Guide (Version B)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FONST 5000

Intelligent OTN Equipment

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

Introduces the retrieval method, contents, releasing,

Introduces the product’s functions and features, protection

Gives a detailed introduction to structures, functions, signal

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Gives a detailed introduction to configuration procedures of

Introduces general process of troubleshooting and

Introduces daily operations on the equipment, including

FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN

Adds the commissioning example for the N×100Gbit/s

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u Data communication technology

u Optical fiber communication technology

u SDH communication theory

FONST 5000 FiberHome FONST 5000 Intelligent OTN Equipment

FiberHome e-Fim OTNM2000 Element Management

8TDGF 8-Port Data Service Interface Card

4LMS2E 16×2G5 Aggregation Line Interface Card

4-Port 10G Aggregation Line Interface Card with Enhanced

2LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

4LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

8LA2 10G Line Interface Card with Super FEC

MST2 8-Port Any Service Transponder Card

Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with Enhanced

4-Port 10G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card With

OTU3F 43G Bidirectional Regenerator with Super FEC

OTU4S 100Gb/s Enhanced FEC Unit (PM-QPSK)

100G Aggregation Optical Transponder Card with

OTU4F 100G Regenerator with EFEC

OMU48_E 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

OMU40_E 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,E)

ODU48_E 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

ODU40_E 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, E)

48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU48_O 48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,O)

OMU40_O 40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card (C,O)

ODU48_O 48 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

ODU40_O 40 Ch Optical Demultiplexer Card (C, O)

48 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

40 Ch Optical Multiplexer Card with Variable Optical

OMU8 8 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU8 8 Ch Optical Splitter Card

OMU4 4 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU4 4 Ch Optical Splitter Card

OMU2 2 Ch Optical Coupler Card

ODU2 2 Ch Optical Splitter Card

WDM2 2 Line WDM Card

OSCAD 1510 / 1550 Optical Multiplexer / Demultiplexer Card

SOAD8 8 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card

SOAD4 4 Ch Optical Add-drop Multiplexer Card

Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Multiplexer Card

Optical Wavelength Selective Switch Demultiplexer Card